JSS-2250 Marine MF/HF GMDSS Radio Transceiver, digital selective calling (DSC) / narrow-band direct printing (NBDP) Modem User Manual

 

MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT Instruction Manual 7ZPJD0622

. CAUTIONS AGAINST HIGH VOLTAGE Radio and radar devices are operated by high voltages of anywhere from a few hundred volts up to many hundreds of thousands of volts. Although there is no danger with normal use, it is very dangerous if contact is made with the internal parts of these devices. (Only specialists should attempt any maintenance, checking or adjusting.) There is a very high risk of death by even a few thousand volts, in some cases you can be fatally electrocuted by just a few hundred volts. To prevent accidents, you should avoid contact with the internal parts of these devices at all costs. If contact is inevitable as in the case of an emergency, you must switch off the devices and ground a terminal in order to discharge the capacitors. After making certain that all the electricity is discharged, only then can you insert your hand into the device. Wearing cotton gloves and putting your left hand in your pocket, in order not to use both hands simultaneously, are also very good methods of shock prevention. Quite often, an injury occurs by secondary factors, therefore it is necessary to choose a sturdy and level working surface. If someone is electrocuted it is necessary to thoroughly disinfect the affected area and seek medical attention as soon as possible. When you find an electrocution victim, you must first switch off the machinery and ground all circuits. If you are unable to cut off the machinery, move the victim away from it using a non-conductive material such as dry boards or clothing. When someone is electrocuted, and the electrical current reaches the breathing synapses of the central nervous system inside the brain, breathing stops. If the victim's condition is stable, he or she can be administered artificial respiration. An electrocution victim becomes very pale, and their pulse can be very weak or even stop, consequently losing consciousness and becoming stiff. Administration of first aid is critical in this situation. Cautions concerning treatment of electrocution victims First aid Note points for first aid Unless there is impending danger leave the victim where he or she is, then begin artificial respiration. Once you begin artificial respiration, you must continue without losing rhythm.

(1) Make contact with the victim cautiously, there is a risk that you may get electrocuted.

(2) Switch off the machinery and then move the victim away slowly if you must.

(3) Inform someone immediately (a hospital or doctor, dial emergency numbers, etc.).

(4) Lay the victim on his or her back and loosen any constrictive clothing (a tie, or belt).

(5) (a) Check the victim's pulse.

(b) Check for a heartbeat by pressing your ear against the victim's chest.

(c) Check if the victim is breathing by putting the back of your hand or face near the victim's face.

(d) Check the pupils of the eyes.

(6) Open the victim's mouth and remove any artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum. Leave the mouth opened and flatten the tongue with a towel or by putting something into the mouth to prevent the victim's tongue from obstructing the throat. (If he or she is clenching the teeth and it is difficult to open the mouth, use a spoon or the like to pry open the mouth.)

(7) Continually wipe the mouth to prevent the accumulation of saliva. If the victim has a pulse but is not breathing

(Mouth to mouth resuscitation) Figure 1

(1) Place the victims head facing backward (place something under the neck like a pillow).

(2) Point the chin upward to widen the trachea.

(3) Pinch the victims nose, take a deep breath, then put your mouth over the victims mouth and exhale completely, making sure that your mouth completely covers the victims mouth. Then remove your mouth. Repeat this routine 10 to 15 times per minute (holding the nostrils).

(4) Pay attention to the victim to notice if he or she starts to breath. If breathing returns, stop resuscitation.

(5) If it is impossible to open the victims mouth, put something like a plastic straw or vinyl tube into one of the nostrils then blow air in while covering the mouth and the other nostril.

(6) Occasionally, when the victim comes back to consciousness, they immediately try to stand up. Prevent this and keep them in a laying position. Give them something warm to drink and be sure that they rest (do not give them any alcohol). Administering artificial respiration by raising the head.

(1) Raise the back of head, then place one hand on the forehead and place the other hand under the neck. Most victims open their mouth when this is done, making mouth to mouth resuscitation easier.

(2) Cover the victims mouth by opening your then push your cheek mouth widely, against the victims nose, or pinch the victims nose to prevent air from leaking out of it.

(3) Completely exhale into the lungs. the into lungs until Exhale inflates. You have to blow as rapidly as possible for the first 10 times. the chest Mouse to mouse artificial respiration Figure 1 If the victim has no pulse and is not breathing

(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2 If the victim has no pulse, his or her pupils are dilated, and if you cannot detect a heartbeat, the heart may have stopped, beginning artificial respiration is critical.

(1) Put both hands on the diaphragm, with hands on top of each other keeping both arms straight (If your elbows are bent, you cannot push with as much power). Press the diaphragm with your body weight until the chest sinks about 2 cm (about 50 times per minute).

(2) If administering first aid when alone:

Perform the heart massage about 15 times then blow in twice. Repeat this routine. If administering first aid with two people:

One person performs the heart massage 5 times, and the other person blows air in once. Repeat this routine (Heart massage and mouth to mouth resuscitation used together).

(3) Constantly check the pupils and the pulse, if the pupils become normal and the pulse steadies, keep them in a laying position and give them something warm to drink, be sure that they rest (do not give them any alcohol). In any case you have to entrust major decision making to a doctor. Having understanding people around is essential to the victims recovery from the mental shock of electrocution.

(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2 Preface Thank you for choosing the Model JRC JSS-2250/2500 (JSS-2250N/2500N) MF/HF radio equipment. The radio equipment can be used as a Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) radio device, compliant with international regulations, that provides emergency communications and standard communications capabilities for small and large ships. Please read this instruction manual thoroughly before using the MF/HF radio equipment, and use it in accordance with the instructions contained herein. Please keep this manual available for future reference. Please refer to it if any difficulties are encountered when using the equipment. v Before operation Concerning the symbols This manual uses the following symbols to explain correct operation and to prevent injury or damage to property. The symbols and descriptions are as follows. Understand them before proceeding with this manual. WARNING Indicates a warning that, if ignored, may result in CAUTION Indicates a caution that, if ignored, may result in injury or damage to property. serious injury or even death. Examples of symbols The symbol indicates caution (including DANGER and WARNING). The illustration inside the symbol specifies the content of the caution more accurately. (This example warns of possible electrical shock.) The symbol indicates that performing an action is prohibited. The illustration inside the symbol specifies the contents of the prohibited operation. (In this example disassembly is prohibited.) The symbol indicates operations that must be performed. The illustration inside the symbol specifies obligatory instructions. (In this example unplugging is the obligatory instruction.) Concerning the WARNING labels The WARNING labels are put on the NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver, NBD-2250/2500 Power supply, NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner, and NBB-714/724 Battery charger. Do not take off, destroy, or modify the labels. NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver (Upper view) vi NBD-2250/2500 Power supply (Upper view) NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner NBB-714/724 Battery charger vii Handling precautions WARNING Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits. Inspection or repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may result in fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. If internal inspection or repair is necessary, contact our service center or agents. Do not disassemble or customize this unit. Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. Do not get this equipment wet or spill any liquids on or near this equipment. Doing so may cause electrical shock, or equipment malfunction. Do not touch any of the areas with warning labels. Doing so may cause electrical shock. Do not use voltage other than that specified. Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. Do not remove protective covers on the high voltage terminals. Doing so may cause electrical shock. Do not insert anything flammable into the equipment. Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or officer in charge. Doing so may save the lives of the crews and passengers on the ship in distress. This equipment is used for both distress communication and routine communication. Contact JRC or our agent if any problem is observed in this unit during routine operation or inspection. viii CAUTION Do not use this equipment anyplace other than specified. Doing so may cause failure or malfunction. Do not turn the trimmer resistors or the trimmer capacitors on the PCB unit. Doing so may cause failure or malfunction. Do not install the equipment in a place near water or in one with excessive humidity, steam, dust, or soot. Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. Do not test the distress alert. Doing so may inconvenience local shipping and rescue centers. Do not turn off the equipment when at sea because the SOLAS Convention requires keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times. Always listen to 2187.5 kHz, and 8414.5 kHz, and one or more of the following frequencies; 4207.5 kHz, 6312.0 kHz, 12577.0 kHz, or 16804.5 kHz. In class B mode, it is necessary to keep watch only on 2187.5 kHz. When completely turning off the power to the equipment, turn off the breakers on the power supply. To operate DSC functions of the equipment, the ID numbers assigned to the ship must be registered in advance. If registration is necessary, contact our service center or agents. To install this equipment, contact our service center or agents. Special knowledge on selecting the place where the antenna is to be mounted and setting the ID number (MMSI) assigned to the ship is required in addition to installing the equipment. When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or officer in charge. If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu and transmit the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the controller. And then report the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue Coordination Center/

in Japan, inform the nearest Japan Coast Guard.) Information to be reported:

Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and reason why the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name and manufacture number/date, if possible. To turn off an alarm or clear a display such as a received DSC message, do not press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may cause a false distress alert.

(Press the CANCEL key to turn off the alarm.) When sending a drobose call, do NOT press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may cause a false distress alert.

(Drobose calls can be sent via the [Call] button displayed on the screen.) A distress acknowledgement or a distress relay call can be transmitted using the option on an active procedure screen, but when sending such a call, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or officer in charge. ix CAUTION DSC messages with incorrect format or data may not be received, but it is not a malfunction. Also if the data terminal is not connected, the equipment does not receive DSC calls requesting ARQ/FEC communication, regardless of either the category of routine, safety, urgency or distress. Received distress message logs are automatically deleted after 48 hours to avoid accidental resending or other misoperation. Accordingly, if such messages cannot be read, it is not a malfunction. The received distress message logs are cleared when turning off the power by such as the breaker on the power supply. Due to the SOLAS Convention

(keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times), do not turn off the equipment when at sea. The time in the 7.1 Date & time menu means the present time, and is different from the time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu that means the time when the position information is valid. The time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu means the time when the position information is valid, and is different from the present time mentioned in the 7.1 Date & time menu. When replacing fuses, always use fuses of the same type. The batteries, except for sealed lead-acid batteries that require no equalization, should be carried out the equalizing charge at least every six months The thermal head of the NKG-91 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not touch the thermal head of the printer. Make sure the thermal head is cool before replacing the paper or cleaning the thermal head. The paper used in the NKG-91 printer is heat sensitive. Take the following precautions when using this paper. Store the paper away from heat, humidity, or heat sources. Do not rub the paper with any hard objects. Do not place the paper near organic solvents. Do not allow the paper to come in contact with polyvinyl chloride film, erasers, or adhesive tape for long periods of time. Keep the paper away from freshly copied diazo type or wet process copy The print head of the NKG-800 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not touch the print head of the printer. Make sure the print head is cool before replacing the paper or cleaning the print head. Do not use the NKG-800 printer if there is no ink ribbon cartridge or paper. Do not twist the ink ribbon when installing the ink ribbon cartridge. Before opening and closing the cover of the NKG-800 printer, turn off the printer. Wait more than 2 seconds after turning the printer off before turning it back on again so it can initialize correctly. Be sure to unmount the USB flash memory before removing it from the NDZ-227 Data terminal at work. paper. x DDDIIISSSTTTRRREEESSSSSS AAALLLEEERRRTTTSSS Sending a Distress Alert CAUTION When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or officer in charge. 111... Open the DISTRESS key cover on the NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER. 222... Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4 seconds to send the distress alert. When the countdown is finished the screen below on the right is displayed, and after antenna tuning the distress alerts are transmitted. D i s t r e s s c a l l s t a r t s I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 333... After sending the distress alert, wait for an acknowledgement. i n s e c4 N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z kHz RX S I G TX I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) D S C R x : 2 1 8 7 . 5 / T x : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z D i s t r e s s c a l l i n g N e x t : - - -

S t a g e : W a i t i n g f o r C H f r e e C a l l - F : / / / / /

N a t u r e : U n d e s i g n a t e d P o s U T C : 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N

: 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e

[ C a n c e l ]

S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z The radiotelephone can be used to communicate even while waiting for an acknowledgement on the screen below left. When an acknowledgement is received, press the CANCEL key or ENT to cancel the alarm on the below right screen, and communicate with the station. Unless an acknowledgement is received or the distress alert is cancelled manually, the equipment repeats the distress alert every 3.5 to 4.5 minutes. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) T E L R x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 / T x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 k H z R x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 / T x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 k H z D i s t r e s s c a l l i n g N e x t : R e s e n d s 4 . 1 m i n l a t e r S t a g e : W a i t i n g f o r A C K C a l l - F : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 N a t u r e : U n d e s i g n a t e d P o s U T C : 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N

: 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e

[ F R Q ] [ P a u s e ] [ P O S ] [ C H N G ] [ C a n c e l ]

S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A D S T A L T R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | O W N D - A C K | 2 M H z D I S T a c k n o w l e d g e d ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) T x : 2|4|6|8|12|16/ U n d e s i g n a t e d / T E L 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 P r e s s C A N C E L t o s i l e n c e a l a r m . xi 444... After receiving acknowledgement, use the radiotelephone to request rescue. First, the responding station calls by radiotelephone. Communicate the following information to that station.

Say "MAYDAY".

Say "This is (name of your ship)".

Tell the station the ship's Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number, call sign, ship's position, nature of distress, and rescue requests. Note If time permits, enter the nature of the distress or the mode (Radiotelephone or FEC) as follows, just before sending the distress alert. (For more details, see 4.5.5 Distress alerts.) 1) Open menu 3. Editing a distress msg. 2) Press ENT on the screen at right and select I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) T E L R x : 4 1 4 6 . 0 / T x : 4 1 4 6 . 0 k H z the nature of the distress. 3) Press ENT to confirm the selection. The nature of the distress is set. If the position and time (UTC) are not displayed automatically for any reason, input them manually at this time. 4) Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4 seconds to send the distress alert. The rest of the procedure is the same as described above. 3 ) E d i t i n g a d i s t r e s s m s g N a t u r e N a t u r e : [ U n d e s i g n a t e d ]

P o s i t i o n : [ N E ]

[ 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N ]

[ 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E ]

U T C o f p o s : [ 2 3 : 5 9 ]

M o d e : [ R a d i o t e l e p h o n e ]

A t t e m p t t y p e : [ M u l t i - F R Q ]

T x b a n d s : [ 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 ]

[ P r e v i e w ] [ T i p s ] [ C a n c e l ]

Terminating a Distress Alert CAUTION If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu and transmit the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the controller. And then report the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue Coordination Center/ in Japan, inform the nearest Japan Coast Guard.) Information to be reported:

Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and reason why the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name and manufacture number/date, if possible. Select the Cancel menu and press ENT on the NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER. The screen shown below is displayed. Then select Continue with the jog dial and press ENT to start the distress cancel procedure referring the guidance displayed on the controller. Note) For more details, see the description in the 4.5.5.1 Quick distress alerts. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) T E L R x : 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x : 2 1 8 2 . 0 k H z D i s t r e s s c a l l i n g N e x t : R e s e n d s 3 . 2 m i n l a t e r S t a g e : W a i t i n g f o r A C K C a l l - F : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6

! ! W a r n i n g ! !

N a t u r e : U n d e s i g n a t e d P o s U T C : 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N

: 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e C a n c e l t h e t r a n s m i t t e d f a l s e d i s t r e s s a l e r t ?

( T G T : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 M )

[ R e t u r n ]

[ C o n t i n u e ] [ R e t u r n ]

[ C a n c e l ]

[ F R Q ] [ P a u s e ] [ P O S ] [ C H N G ] [ C a n c e l ]

S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z xii Receiving a Distress Alert WARNING If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or officer in charge. Doing so may save the lives of the crew and passengers on the ship in distress. 111... When a distress alert is received, the information such as the ID number of the ship in distress and the stage of the distress event are displayed. If the equipment is not used, i.e. there is no active procedure at that time, a distress and safety frequency is set and the ALM lamp starts blinking, and an alarm gradually grows louder. 222... Press the CANCEL key to stop the alarm. If the popup screen is shown, select "Accept"

and press ENT. After the specified communicate mode and the distress frequency are set, keep watch under such a condition. Keep watch for five minutes or more, and executes the report to the coast station etc. as appropriate A R : D S T A L T A R : D S T A L T I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) 333... To acknowledge to the distress alert after coordination with the coast station, from the S A M E D S T O N A N O T H E R F R Q F r o m : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 W o r k - F : 8 2 9 1 . 0 k H z E Q P w i l l t u n e t o t h e a b o v e F R Q w i t h i n 1 0 s .

[ A c c e p t ] [ I g n o r e ]

TEL 8291.0 8291.0 T E L : R x 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x 2 1 8 2 . 0 k H z

[ A C K ] [ R L Y ] [ I N F ] [ F R Q ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

R x F R : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | D I S T R E S S A L T W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) M u l t i - F R Q : 2 / / / 8 / / 1 6 S i n g l e - F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z T E L : R x 8 2 9 1 . 0 / T x 8 2 9 1 . 0 K H z

[ A C K ] [ R L Y ] [ I N F ] [ F R Q ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | D I S T R E S S A L T W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 6 m i n ) A D S T A L T

[ A c c e p t ]

above right screen, press FUNC key to move the active screen to the message control area. Then select ACK with jog dial and press ENT to send the acknowledgement. After acknowledging the distress alert, communicate with the ship in distress as follows;

Say "MAYDAY".

Repeat the identity (MMSI) of the ship in distress 3 times

Say, "This is".

Repeat the identity (MMSI) of your ship 3 times

Say "RECEIVED MAYDAY". xiii Equipment exterior JSS-2250/2500 (JSS-2250N/2500N) 250W/500W MF/HF Radio Equipment Note: According to the composition, the model variants are as follows. JSS-2250 JSS-2250N JSS-2500 JSS-2500N

-

-

-

-

In this document, unless otherwise specified, JSS-2250/2500 may include JSS-2250N/2500N.

:250W Radiotelephone/ DSC

:250W Radiotelephone/ DSC & NBDP

:500W Radiotelephone/ DSC

:500W Radiotelephone/ DSC & NBDP NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver NBD-2250/2500 Power supply NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner NCM-2150 MF/HF Controller/NQW-261 Handset xiv NDZ-227 Data terminal / NDF-369 Keyboard NKG-800 Printer xv DPU-414 Printer NKG-91 Printer NBB-714 Battery charger (10A) NBB-724 Battery charger NCH-321A Distress Message Controller (DMC) xvi Contents Preface ......................................................................................................... Before operation ......................................................................................... v vi Handling precautions ................................................................................. viii DISTRESS ALERTS .................................................................................... xi Equipment exterior ..................................................................................... xiv Glossary of terms ....................................................................................... xxi 1. EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 1-1 1.1 Functions ................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Features ..................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Basic configuration .................................................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) ................................................................................ 1-2 1.3.1.1 Standard components .................................................................................. 1-2 1.3.1.2 Options ........................................................................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) ................................................................ 1-3 1.3.2.1 Standard components .................................................................................. 1-3 1.3.2.2 Options ........................................................................................................... 1-3 1.3.3 System configuration ........................................................................................... 1-4 1.4 External dimensions .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.5 Block diagram ............................................................................................................ 1-12 1.5.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) ................................................................................ 1-12 1.5.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) ................................................................ 1-13 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 2-1 2-1 2.1 Controller (NCM-2150) .............................................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Controllers display ...................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.1 Status display ....................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.2 Operating display ................................................................................................. 2-6 2.2.3 Function screen and key operations .................................................................... 2-7 2.2.4 Menu screen ........................................................................................................ 2-8 2.3 Data terminalNDZ-227 ......................................................................................... 2-9 2.4 Display of data terminal ............................................................................................... 2.4.1 Regular screen ..................................................................................................... 2-9 2.4.2 Telex communication screen ................................................................................ 2-10 2.4.3 Message file edit screen ...................................................................................... 2-11 3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 3-1 4. OPERATION ............................................................................................ 4-1 4.1 Operation overview ................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Operation of the controller .................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Operation of the data terminal ............................................................................. 4-4 4.2 Basic communications procedure ............................................................................. 4-6 4.2.1 Turning on the power .......................................................................................... 4-6 4.2.2 Turning off the power/ Putting into sleep mode ................................................... 4-7 4.2.3 Communicating in radiotelephone mode ............................................................ 4-8 4.2.4 Communicating in CW mode .............................................................................. 4-10 4.2.5 Receiving AM broadcasts .................................................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Communicating in telex mode (TLX) ................................................................... 4-13 4.2.6.1 ARQ mode operation ................................................................................... 4-13 4.2.6.2 CFEC mode operation ................................................................................. 4-16 4.2.6.3 SFEC mode operation ................................................................................. 4-20 4.2.6.4 Editing telex messages ................................................................................ 4-22 4.3 Setting the radio ........................................................................................................ 4-25 4.3.1 Setting the communication frequencies .............................................................. 4-25 4.3.2 Setting the communication channels .................................................................. 4-26 4.3.3 Setting the automatic gain control (AGC) ........................................................... 4-30 4.3.4 Setting the noise reduction (NR) ......................................................................... 4-30 4.3.5 Setting the attenuation (ATT) .............................................................................. 4-31 4.3.6 Setting the clarifier ............................................................................................... 4-31 4.3.7 Setting the squelch level ..................................................................................... 4-32 4.3.8 Setting the CW bandwidth ................................................................................... 4-32 4.3.9 Scanning the Rx frequencies .............................................................................. 4-33 4.3.10 Reducing the Tx power ....................................................................................... 4-35 4.3.11 Setting the antenna tuning power ....................................................................... 4-35 4.3.12 Setting the Auto Tune Start (ATS) function .......................................................... 4-35 4.4 Basic DSC operations ................................................................................................. 4-36 4.4.1 Routine calls to an individual station ................................................................... 4-36 4.4.2 Receiving routine individual calls ........................................................................ 4-38 4.4.3 Routine group calls .............................................................................................. 4-40 4.4.4 Receiving routine group calls .............................................................................. 4-40 4.5 Emergency calls (DSC distress/urgency/safety calls) ................................................ 4-41 4.5.1 Safety or urgency calls to an individual station ................................................... 4-41 4.5.1.1 Special safety individual calls ...................................................................... 4-41 4.5.2 Receiving safety or urgency individual calls ....................................................... 4-43 4.5.2.1 Receiving special safety individual calls ...................................................... 4-43 4.5.3 Safety or urgency area calls ................................................................................ 4-44 4.5.4 Receiving safety or urgency area calls ............................................................... 4-45 4.5.5 Distress alerts ...................................................................................................... 4-46 4.5.5.1 Quick distress alerts .................................................................................... 4-46 4.5.5.2 Distress alerts from the menu ...................................................................... 4-49 4.5.5.3 Receiving distress alerts .............................................................................. 4-52 4.5.6 Distress relay calls on behalf of someone else (DROBOSE) ............................. 4-53 4.6 DSC call log ............................................................................................................... 4-55 4.6.1 Received distress messages ............................................................................... 4-55 4.6.2 Received other messages ................................................................................... 4-56 4.6.3 Transmitted messages ......................................................................................... 4-56 4.7 Display of telex communication logs ......................................................................... 4-57 4.8 USB memory operation ............................................................................................. 4-58 4.9 Popup screens ........................................................................................................... 4-59 5. SETTINGS & REGISTRATIONS .............................................................. 5-1 5-1 5.1 Date and time settings ............................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Own ship position and time settings .......................................................................... 5-4 5.3 Controller settings ...................................................................................................... 5-4 5.3.1 LCD adjustment ................................................................................................... 5-4 5.3.2 Sound settings ..................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3.3 User key assignments .......................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.4 Selecting Tx meters ............................................................................................. 5-7 5.3.5 Transferring user channel data to another controller ........................................... 5-8 5.3.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for menu shutdown) .................................................. 5-8 5.3.7 Setting the reference value for the channel auto search ..................................... 5.4 Registering user channels ......................................................................................... 5-9 5.5 Advanced settings for DSC/WKR .............................................................................. 5-11 5.5.1 Automatic acknowledgement ............................................................................... 5-11 5.5.2 Setting DSC watch frequency .............................................................................. 5-11 5.5.3 Setting receiving alarms ....................................................................................... 5-12 5.5.4 Using medical/neutral settings for urgency calls .................................................. 5-12 5.5.5 Registering the ship's group ID ............................................................................ 5-12 5.5.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for procedures on hold) ............................................ 5-13 5.5.7 Registering the DSC call list ................................................................................ 5-13 5.6 Setting connections for options ................................................................................. 5-14 5.7 Setting of data terminal .............................................................................................. 5-15 5.7.1 LCD adjustment ................................................................................................... 5-15 5.7.2 Registering station list .......................................................................................... 5-17 5.8 Setting telex mode ..................................................................................................... 5-19 6.1 General maintenance & inspection ............................................................................ 6.2 Self diagnosis inspection ........................................................................................... 6.3 System alarm indication ............................................................................................ 6.3.1 Alarm list .............................................................................................................. 6.3.2 Viewing the alarm history ..................................................................................... 6. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION ............................................................. 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-5 6-6 6-9 6.4 Software version ........................................................................................................ 6-10 6.5 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 6-11 6.5.1 Procedures for locating malfunctions ................................................................... 6-11 6.5.2 Guide to locating faults ........................................................................................ 6-12 6.5.3 Consumables ....................................................................................................... 6-13 6.5.4 Repair units/parts ................................................................................................. 6-13 6.5.5 Regular replacement parts ................................................................................... 6-14 7. AFTER-SALES SERVICE ....................................................................... 7-1 8. DISPOSAL ............................................................................................... 8-1 9. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................... 9-1 9-1 9-5 9-7 9.1 JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF Radio Equipment ................................................................ 9.2 Options ...................................................................................................................... 9.3 Peripheral interfaces ................................................................................................. 10. OPTIONS OPERATION ......................................................................... 10-1 10.1 Battery charger (NBB-714) ....................................................................................... 10-1 10.2 Battery charger (NBB-724) ....................................................................................... 10-3 10.3 Printer (NKG-91) ....................................................................................................... 10-5 10.4 Printer (NKG-800) ..................................................................................................... 10-6 10.5 Operations using a SELCALL unit ............................................................................ 10-9 11. Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1 11.1 Frequencies for distress and safety calls .................................................................. 11-1 11.2 National DSC frequencies for routine calls ............................................................... 11-2 11.3 International DSC frequencies for routine calls ........................................................ 11-2 11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX) ................................................................................ 11-3 11.5 Guide to MF/HF operation ........................................................................................ 11-23 Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements Marking with market circulation mark Glossary of terms This section defines general and DSC terms related to this equipment. General terms AMVER Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel Rescue System System that informs another ship of position of distress ship operated in the United States. ARQ Automatic Repeat reQuest When communicating interactive in the telex mode, this ARQ is used. CFEC Collective Forward Error Correction When broadcasting in the telex mode, this CFEC is used. DSC Digital Selective Calling device Used in routine calls, safety and urgency calls, and distress alerts for rescue requests. GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System. GPS Global Positioning system IMO International Maritime Organization ITU International Telecommunication Union Establishes conventions and regulations for all electrical wired and radio, land, sea, air, and space communications. It contains internal organizations such as ITU-R and ITU-T. ITU-R The International Telecommunications Union

(ITU) radio communications department. JASREP Japanese Ship Reporting System Ship position reporting system operated in Japan. LT Local time MF/HF Medium frequencies and high frequencies

(300 kHz to 30 MHz) MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity The 9-digit Maritime Mobile Service Identity number assigned to each ship and coast station. NBDP Narrow Band Direct Printing It is a generic name of the device used to communicate in the telex mode. NMEA Maritime equipment transmission standard established the National Marine Electronics Association. by PTT Push to talk RCC Rescue Co-ordinate Center RMS ship Remote Maintenance System Transmits information equipment temporarily stored in the VDR via Inmarsat to land, in maintenance and management of radio equipment. for use RR Radio Regulations International regulations for radio transmission established by the treaty of the ITU. SELCAL Number(Selective Calling Number) Selective Calling Number by NBDP. It is the numbers of four digits (coast station) or five digits (Ship station) used when the other party is specified in the telex mode. xxi SFEC Selective Forward Error Correction When broadcasting to a specific group in the telex mode, this SFEC is used. SOLAS Convention International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea The international convention applies to all ships engaged on international voyages. A safety certificate is issued if the conditions of this convention are satisfied. SQL Squelch A function that acts to suppress the audio output of a receiver in the absence of a radio signal of sufficient strength. DSC terms Address General term for Maritime Mobile Serive Identity number (MMSI). This equipment uses To/From to distinguish between the sender and receiver. It also means the Self-ID (own ship MMSI) and Dist-ID (MMSI of a ship in distress). Category Message code indicating priority of the call. Priority levels are listed below. Routine General calls for routine work Safety Calls for safety communications Urgency Calls for urgent communications Distress Calls for distress communications DROBOSE Distress relay call (to individual or to area) on behalf of someone else who is in distress. EOS (End Of Sequence) code appended Termination messages. Other codes are listed below. ACK RQ Acknowledgement request ACK BQ Acknowledgement responding call to to the ACK RQ ECC (Error Check Character) Error check code appended to the end of call messages. This is not normally displayed, but if an error occurs on a message, an ECC error is displayed. xxii UTC Universal Time Coordinated VOL (Volume) Speaker volume WRC World Radiocommunication Conference WKR Watch Keeping Receiver The WKR monitoring frequencies. is the distress the receiver dedicated to safety and Mode Message code mode after a DSC call. This equipment is fixed to radiotelephone. indicating communication Radiotelephone (TEL) or ARQ and FEC

(TLX) can be used. Nature of Distress Message code indicating the type of distress when a distress alert is issued. Codes are listed below. Fire Flooding Collision Grounding Listing Sinking Disabled Undesignated Abandoning Piracy attack Man overboard Man overboard Fire, explosion Flooding Collision Grounding Risk of ship capsizing Sinking Ship inoperable/adrift Undesignated distress Abandoning ship Piracy/robbery attack Polling Polling is a feature for routine calling. It is used, for example, to confirm whether a ship is within radio range when a coast station requests navigational information of the ship. Reason Message code indicating reason for negative acknowledgement response. Codes are listed below. No reason Congestion Busy Queue Barred No operator Temp no oper EQP disabled Unable FRQ Unable mode No reason Maritime information exchange center congested Busy Queued Station barred No operator Temporarily no operator Equipment disabled Indicated cannot be used Indicated mode cannot be used frequency Rx FRQ Received frequency of the call Subject/ Sub Message code clarifying communication contents when sending an urgency call to all ships. When sailing in dangerous waters, such as in areas of political instability, these call messages are used with following information. Neutral ship: In accordance with ITU resolution 18 (Mob-83), inform all ships that own ship is of neutral nationality. the Medical TRANSP:

Inform all ships that own ship is performing medical transportation, and is protected under the 1949 Geneva Convention. Topic Message codes in an acknowledged message After sending an individual call, "Unable to comply" is displayed when the responding station cannot comply. Type Message code indicating the type of the call. Codes are listed below. Individual call Individual ACK Acknowledgement Individual call message of individual call message Individual NACK Negative acknowledgement of individual call message Group call message Group call GEO area call Area call message All ships call Distress Distress ACK Acknowledgement Call to all ships Distress alert message of distress alert message Distress relay Distress relay message Distress relay ACK Acknowledgement of distress relay message Distress relay GEO Area call of distress relay message Intent Message code indicating specific content. Indicates the type of the call for a specific purpose, not for radiotelephone communication. Polling Position RQ Ship position Test Polling Ship position request Ship position notification Safety test call Work FRQ/ WFRQ Message code frequency after a DSC call. indicating communication xxiii xxiv Equipment Overview 1. EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW 1.1 Functions This equipment includes MF/HF transceiver, Class-A DSC and DSC watch keeping receiver required as the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). It is designed as a separated transceiver and small, lightweight controller(s) for easy installation not only in SOLAS Convention ships such as international passenger ships and freight ships of 300 tons or more, but also non-conventional ships of less than 300 tons. As for the main communication function, in addition to the communications of radiotelephone with the handset and the Morse communication with the CW keyer, calling by digital selective calling (DSC) for a general or distress communication are possible. Furthermore, if the data terminal is connected to the controller, the telex communication in the ARQ or FEC mode using the NBDP is available. 1.2 Features Compliant with the ITU Radio Regulations (RR), the IMO performance standards, and the ITU-R recommendations. Contains all channels specified in the ITU Radio Regulations (RR). The separately designed controller and main unit enable easy installation in limited or difficult spaces. A semi-transmissive LCD with a wide viewing angle is easily viewable even in direct light or when backlit and allows it to be installed in a variety of positions. The backlights of the LCD and operation keys are fully adjustable, preventing interference with night watch keeping. When in distress, the DSC can send a distress message with the expanded position data accurate up to 1/10000 of a minute for both latitude and longitude to make search and rescue operations by the RCC easier. High-quality stable operation is possible by using DSP technology on a transceiver with a DSC/WKR modem. The DSC operates in Class A mode suitable for all areas, and in Class B mode limited to ships navigating in A1 and A2 areas. An advanced digital audio amplifier with a built-in loud speaker provides a maximum of 5 W of clear audio. The maintenance and the check can be easily done at daily or the regular services, because a special function key was prepared for the DSC safety test calling and the self-diagnosis. It is possible to operate on the screen with the character color and the background color corresponding to the favor because the data terminal for the telex communication by NBDP adopted the color liquid crystal display of the wide viewing angle in high brightness. Besides printers and GPS, other peripherals such as the remote maintenance system (RMS) can be connected to the equipment. 1-1 Equipment Overview 1.3 Basic configuration 1.3.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) 11..33..11..11 Standard components No. 1 2 3 3-1 3-2 4 5 Description Transceiver Power supply MF/HF controller Controller cable Handset Antenna tuner Instruction manual 11..33..11..22 Options Model NTD-2250/2500 NBD-2250/2500 NCM-2150 7ZCJD0343 NQW-261 NFC-2250/2500 7ZPJD0622 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes For 250W and 500W respectively For 250W and 500W respectively 5m Includes the cradle For 250W and 500W respectively This manual Description Battery charger Battery charger Joint box Junction box Coaxial connector MF/HF controller Controller cable Handset Flush mounting bracket Mounting bracket Connection box Printer Printer connection cable Printer power cable Printer paper Ink ribbon (SP-16051) Printer Printer connection cable Printer paper Wall mounting bracket Printer Printer connection cable Printer power cable Printer paper Distress message controller Model NBB-724 NBB-714 JQD-69C NQD-2253 M-P-7, M-A-JJ NCM-2150 7ZCJD0343 NQW-261 MPBC42957 MPBX44354 NQD-2250 NKG-800/900 6ZCSC00407 6JNKD00100B 5ZPCM00020 5ZZCM00003 NKG-91 7ZCJD0254A 7ZPJD0384 MPBP31446 DPU-414 7ZCJD0254A 7ZCJD0257C 6ZCAF00252A NCH-321A Notes 22A 10A *For maintenance-free sealed battery only For both RX and WKR For RG-12/UY and RG-10/UY One additional controller available. 5m Waterproof type (IP66 equivalent) For extension and expansion of the controller Desktop type Wall mount or flush mount type Desktop type No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 10 1-2 1.3.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) 11..33..22..11 Standard components No. 1 2 3 3-1 3-2 4 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 6 6-1 6-2 7 Description Transceiver Power supply MF/HF controller Controller cable Handset Antenna tuner Data terminal DTE cable DTE power cable Keyboard Printer Printer connection cable Printer power cable Instruction manual 11..33..22..22 Options No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 10 10-1 10-2 10-3 11 Description Battery charger Battery charger Joint box Junction box Coaxial connector MF/HF controller Controller cable Handset Flush mounting bracket Mounting bracket Connection box Data terminal DTE cable DTE power cable Keyboard Mounting bracket USB memory Printer Printer connection cable Printer power cable Printer paper Ink ribbon (SP-16051) Printer Printer connection cable Printer paper Wall mounting bracket Printer Printer connection cable Printer power cable Printer paper Distress message controller Model NTD-2250/2500 NBD-2250/2500 NCM-2150 7ZCJD0343 NQW-261 NFC-2250/2500 NDZ-227 7ZCJD0388 7ZCJD0419 NDF-369 NKG-800 7ZCSC0205A 6JNKD00100B 7ZPJD0622 Model NBB-724 NBB-714 JQD-69C NQD-2253 M-P-7, M-A-JJ NCM-2150 7ZCJD0343 NQW-261 MPBC42957 MPBX44354 NQD-2250 NDZ-227 7ZCJD0388 7ZCJD0419 NDF-369 MPBP31721 UDG4-1GAR-JRC NKG-800/900 7ZCSC0205A 6JNKD00100B 5ZPCM00020 5ZZCM00003 NKG-91 7ZCJD0254A 7ZPJD0384 MPBP31446 DPU-414 7ZCJD0254A 7ZCJD0257C 6ZCAF00252A NCH-321A Equipment Overview Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes For 250W and 500W respectively For 250W and 500W respectively 5m Includes the cradle For 250W and 500W respectively NBDP option This manual Notes 22A 10A *For maintenance-free sealed battery only For both RX and WKR For RG-12/UY and RG-10/UY One additional controller available. 5m Waterproof type (IP66 equivalent) For extension and expansion of the controller For expansion of the controller Hagiwara Sys-Com / 1GB Desktop type Wall mount or flush mount type Desktop type 1-3 Equipment Overview NCM-2150 MF/HF Controller NQW-261 Handset 1.3.3 System configuration NFC-2250/2500 Antenna Tuner 1-4 NDZ-227 Data terminal NDF-369 Keyboard

(DSC/NBDP model only) NKG-800 Printer Expansion Controller NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver GPS NBD-2250/2500 Power supply NBB-724 Battery charger NCH-321A DMC

* The equipment can also be connected to the VDR server to use the remote maintenance system. 1.4 External dimensions Below are the external dimensions of each unit. Transceiver (NTD-2250/2500) Power Supply (NBD-2250/2500) Equipment Overview Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 15 kg/ 17 kg Note) This figure shows the NTD-2250. Incase of the NTD-2500, 3 fans are mounted on the back. Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 15 kg/ 18 kg 1-5 Equipment Overview MF/HF Controller (NCM-2150) Handset (NQW-261) Connection box (NQD-2250) 1-6 Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 1.3 kg Mounting hole Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 0.5 kg Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 0.6 kg Antenna Tuner (NFC-2250/2500) Junction Box (NQD-2253) Equipment Overview Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 10 kg/ 10 kg Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 1.2 kg 1-7 Equipment Overview Data Terminal (NDZ-227) Keyboard (NDF-369) 1-8 Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 4.6 kg Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 0.4 kg Printer (NKG-800) Desktop type Desktop type Printer (DPU-414) Equipment Overview Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 3.7 kg Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 0.6 kg 1-9 Equipment Overview Printer (NKG-91) Wall mount type Flash mount type 1-10 Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 1.5 kg Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 0.8 kg Battery Charger (NBB-714) Battery Charger (NBB-724) Equipment Overview Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 8.6 kg Unit: mm Weight: Approx. 12 kg 1-11 Equipment Overview box 6.5V DC 7ZCJD0254A NCM-2150 TTYCS- 4 DPYC-2.5 NQW-261 Handset 7ZCJD 0343 5m MF/HF Controller NQD-2250 Connection 1.5 Block diagram 1.5.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) NQD-2250 Connection NKG-91 Printer Expansion controller TTYCS- 4 DPYC-2.5 box 1-12 Tx antenna Lead wire TH-19/1.2 TX ANT NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner Rx/WKR antenna JQD-69C Joint box RG-12/UY M-P-7 RX/WKR ANT M-P-7 NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver TX ANT RG-10/UY TTYCYS-4 NBD-2250/2500 Power supply NBB-724 Battery charger M-P-7/M-P-5 M-A-JJ 7ZCJD 0426 NQD-2253 Junction box DPYC-16 DPYC-25 100V/220V AC 50/60Hz 1 24V DC 200Ah TTYCS- 1 MPYCS- 7 TTYCS- 1 TTYCS- 4 GPS NCH-321A DMC RMS

(VDR) AME Equipment Overview Tx antenna Lead wire TH-19/1.2 TX ANT NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner M-P-7/M-P-5 M-A-JJ 7ZCJD 0426 M-P-7 RG-10/UY TX ANT TTYCYS-4 NQD-2253 Junction box DPYC-16 DPYC-25 100V/220V AC 50/60Hz 1 24V DC 200Ah Rx/WKR antenna JQD-69C Joint box RG-12/UY M-P-7 NQW-261 Handset 1.5.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) NDF-369 Keyboard NQD-2250 Connection MF/HF Controller 7ZCJD 0343 5m Data terminal TTYCS- 4 DPYC-2.5 NCM-2150 NDZ-227 7ZCJD0388 7ZCJD0419 box 7ZCSC0205A 6JNKD00100B RX/WKR ANT NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver NBD-2250/2500 Power supply NBB-724 Battery charger NKG-800 Printer TTYCS- 4 DPYC-2.5 NQD-2250 Connection box Expansion controller TTYCS- 1 MPYCS- 7 TTYCS- 1 TTYCS- 4 GPS NCH-321A DMC RMS

(VDR) AME 1-13 Equipment Overview 1-14 2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Names and Functions 1 2.1 Controller (NCM-2150) The controller parts and their functions are described below. 10 6 7 2 8 9 11 12 3 4 5 13 14 Internal loud speaker 1. 2. Jack for telegraph in continuous wave (CW) mode 3. Black and white liquid crystal display unit 4. Numeric keypad (10-key) and function keys Sets TEL mode with the last or default frequency. Sets DSC mode with the last or default frequency. Sets CW mode with the last or default frequency. In addition to entering numeric values, when combined with the FUNC key, the keys have the following functions. TEL DSC CW 1CLAR Displays the setting screen for the clarifier. 2SCAN Displays the scan menu. 3NR 4ATT 5AGC 6SP 7PRN 8TEST Displays the self-diagnosis menu. 9 0 FUNC Enables 10-key functions or changes an active screen. Displays the setting screen for noise reduction. Displays the setting screen for attenuation. Displays the setting screen for automatic gain control. Turns speaker on or off. Prints the specified screen. Switches Tx power between high, medium and low. Displays the DSC test call menu. PWR RDC TEST CALL 2-1 15 16 Names and Functions ENT Enter key. USER User defined key. Register a frequently used menu to open it quickly. ANT TUNE CH Tunes the antenna. Sets the channel input mode (user channel, ITU channel, or free frequency). 5. Jog dial

- On the status display, rotating the jog dial changes the channel or Rx frequency.

- On the operating display, rotating the jog dial changes the frequency on the transceiver setting screen, selects the event on the procedure list screen, or selects the handling menu on the message/event control screen.

- On a menu or popup screen, rotating the jog dial moves the cursor position or screen contents. When selecting a button or an item on the screen, rotate the jog dial until the cursor is on it and then press the jog dial. Note Pressing the jog dial works as with the Enter key. 6. Handset connector 7. DISTRESS key (Under a clear cover with spring) When in distress, sends a DSC distress alert when pressed and held for 4 seconds. 8. RF GAIN control Adjusts sensitivity level. Note RF GAIN is set to maximum just after DSC or TLX mode is set, regardless of the position of the control. 9. DIM (Dimmer) key Adjusts dimmer level (Max Typ Min Off) of the LCD display and key switches. Additionally used to put into sleep mode by pressing it in combination with the key at the same time (a confirmation screen is displayed). PWR CONT Note The adjusted dimmer level is not saved. When the controller is powered off and on again, the dimmer level is always set to Typ (default). If a DSC message is received, the dimmer adjustment cycle becomes "Max Typ Typ Typ" while the receiving alarm is activated. 10. PWR/CONT (Power/Contrast) key Turns on the equipment or changes the controller from sleep mode to standby. Once turned on, this key is also used to adjust the LCD contrast. 11. VOL (Volume) control Adjusts volume of built-in loud speaker. 12. ALM/WKR (Alarm/Watchkeeping receiver) lamp Lights up red on any malfunction detected in the equipment or after sending a DSC distress alert, or blinks red on receiving a DSC call. Lights green to indicate the DSC watchkeeping receiver is operating while the equipment is in sleep mode. 13. CANCEL key Cancels menus, a procedure on the operating display or stops alarms. 14. MENU key Displays menu list. 15. Handset When using in radiotelephone mode, press and hold the PTT key to talk. 16. Cradle (for handset) 2-2 Names and Functions 2.2 Controllers display The LCD screen on the controller changes according to current conditions. This section describes the status display, operating display, FUNC menu, and main menu screens. 2.2.1 Status display TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RX kHz 10 S I G TX

*

1. Occupied mark. Indicates another controller 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. the communication mode and has the access rights. Indicates the ship's MMSI. Indicates the ship's position and that time. Indicates channel. Indicates the receiver is scanning. Indicates the Tx power condition (reduction settings) as follows.

High

Medium

Low Indicates frequency is not tuned.

Not tuned

Tuning

Tuned Indicates transmission status (PA power).

: (Blank)

:

:

: Blinks

: Lights

: (Blank) following conditions if Tx the 8. 9. When in reception or standby, indicates strength of received signal (S meter), or when in transmission, indicates strength of transmitted signal in one of the pre-set units shown below.

Tx power (PWR)

Antenna current (Ia)

PA voltage (Vc)

PA current (Ic)

Key information (KEY) Note: When transmitting in ARQ mode, KEY is displayed regardless of the above mentioned setting. Additionally, the right icon indicates the built-in loud speaker is on or off. The mark of indicates the squelch is on. 10. Indicates the frequency (band) the DSC watch keeping receiver is monitoring for distress and safety calls. 11. Indicates the equipment is running on DC power. 12. Indicates current time as follows:

Universal time coordinated : UTC

Local time

: LT 13. Indicates the source of the ship's position information as follows.

External device (e.g. GPS) : EXT

: MAN

Manual input

No input

: OFFLINE 14. Indicates the user channel in use is transmitted at the band power level because the channel power is not registered. 15. Indicates channel or frequency is duplex for communicating with a coast station. 16. Indicates the reception frequency. 17. Indicates the transmission frequency. TX mark is highlighted when transmitting. 18. Indicates the reception status (attenuation, AGC, noise reduction). 19. Indicates the operation guidance (shortcut) to send the DSC messages.

NonDST: To send a non-distress alert, holding down the MENU, press 1 key.

DROBOS: To send a drobose call, holding down the MENU, press 2 key.

EdtDST: To edit & send a distress alert, holding down the MENU, press 3 key. 2-3 Names and Functions 2.2.2 Operating display 1 2 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T )

(1) General After setting the frequency, pressing PTT key in TEL mode, sending/receiving messages in DSC/TLX mode, and things like that, the controller shows the operating display as follows. TEL 13077.0 12230.0 T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 1 3 0 7 7 . 0 / T x : 1 2 2 3 0 . 0 k H z 3 DUP 5 6 4 AA 1. 2. Indicates the MMSI and the latest position and that time. Indicates an focused screen with sign and thick-frame, i.e. the operating display is divided into three screens as below, where the focused screen can be moved using the FUNC key for clockwise. 4. 5. 3. Transceiver setting Procedure list Message/event control Indicates the transceiver setting screen similar to the status display. Icons on this area are as follows.

Scanning

Not tuned yet

Tx power reduction

Turned the PA ON

Attenuation (dB)

AGC (Fast/ Slow)

Noise reduction (NR1/NR2/BC)

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

6. Indicates the S meter and watchkeeping receiver monitoring frequencies mentioned above. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) Indicates the existing procedures. If the procedure is under operation (active), A mark is added in the box frame. Further, if other procedures on hold exist, they are indicated in the other box frames and are selectable to operate at any time. And while this screen is focused, the turning dial animation is shown as below. Indicates the content and the handling menus of the procedure located at the top of the procedure list screen. TEL 13077.0 12230.0 T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 1 3 0 7 7 . 0 / T x : 1 2 2 3 0 . 0 k H z DUP AA Note During operating an active procedure, any functions such like the DSC automatic acknowledgement become invalid to avoid the ongoing communication interruption. 2-4 Names and Functions

(2) Operating display of DSC calls When communicating using DSC messages, the controller shows as follows. 5 7 1 2 3 4 6 8 1. Indicates the transceiver setting screen similar to the status display mentioned above. 2. Indicates the message type according to the following components.

Category

Call direction : Calling event -

Called event -

: RTN routine SAF safety URG urgency DST distress

Address type : IND individual

DST type

Other type ARE area GRP group

: ALT distress alert RLY distress relay CNL distress cancel ACK distress ack

: TST safety test POS safety position POLL routine polling EOS routine ind w/o ack Additionally, indicates COMM if started communication without using DSC. 3. Indicates procedures information of active or on hold with the DSC categories or COM. 4. Indicates the message info as follows;

Destination/source ID to comm with:

TxTO/RxID

Address type:

IND, Area, GRP, All

Category or DST type:

RTN, SAF, URG, DST DISTRESS ALT, DST RLY,

Other information:

ACK, NACK 5. 6. 7. 8. Indicates the DSC message status with the elapsed time of the top frame procedure. Additionally the following special marks may be indicated on this line. E Indicates when including the ECC error in the message. D Indicates when the DSC procedure is started by receiving a delayed ACK without a calling message. Indicates the message received frequency. Indicates the subsequent frequency if exist. Indicates the handling menus. This figure shows the following menus.

ACK

NCK

NEW

INF

HLD

END

: Accepts the call and sends ACK

: Sends unable to comply

: Sends ACK with new work FRQ

: Indicates the detail info

: Makes the active proc on hold

: Terminates the procedure Note

- When sending the able to comply acknowledgement against the received message requesting the TEL communication, lifting handset is also available as a substitute for selecting the ACK handling menu.

- When selecting the NEW or NCK menu, the dedicated popup screen is appeared.

- When sending an acknowledgement automatically to the receiving calls such as position request, safety test, polling, or the call requesting communication with an invalid frequency, the above screen is shown and starts sending automatically. After finishing it, that screen is closed automatically. 2-5 Names and Functions 2.2.3 Function screen and key operations The functions assigned to the number keys are temporarily enabled by pressing the FUNC key in the status display or holding down the FUNC key and pressing the number key. 1 2 Indicates the enabled number key and its function when the FUNC key is pressed in the status display. Pressing the number keys here operates the function for that key as shown at the right. 1.

: Displays the noise reduction menu

: Displays the attenuation menu

: Displays the AGC menu

: Turns the built-in loud speaker on or off

: PRN is valid only on specific menus. 1 CLAR : Displays the clarifier adjustment menu 2 SCAN : Displays the scan menu 3 NR 4 ATT 5 AGC 6 SP 7 N/A 8 TEST : Displays the self-diagnosis menu PWR 9 RDC 0 TstCall : Displays the DSC test call menu FuncCncl : Closes this screen

: Displays the Tx power reduction menu 2. Indicates that pressing ENT enables or disables the use of the jog dial to change the frequency and channel in the status display. Note

- During the operating display mentioned above, the function screen is not appeared. In this case the FUNC key alone is available to select the screen. However note that the holding down the FUNC key and pressing the number key is also valid.

- In the following situations the function assigned to the function key cannot be used. Equipment status 1CLAR 2SCAN 3NR 4ATT 5AGC 6SP 7PRN 8TEST 9 PWR RDC 0 TEST CALL DSC mode While printing During self-diagnosis While scanning While alarm screen is displayed 2-6 2.2.4 Menu screen 1 2 Names and Functions 3 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) T E L R x : 1 3 0 7 7 . 0 / T x : 1 2 2 3 0 . 0 k H z M a i n m e n u 1 . D S C n o n - d i s t r e s s c a l l 1 . D S C n o n - d i s t r e s s c a l l 2 . D S C d r o b o s e c a l l 3 . E d i t i n g a d i s t r e s s m s g 4 . D S C l o g s 5 . R a d i o o p e r a t i o n 6 . M a i n t e n a n c e 7 . S e t u p 0 . B a c k 1. 2. Indicates the current menu name. 3. Indicates the menu content. The cursor line or position is highlighted. Select items with the jog dial and press ENT to confirm. Indicates the main radio information the same as the status display. Also indicates the following marks in the frequency information area according to the conditions. T Performing the antenna tuning

(Blinking means Not tuned.) M Tx power is Medium. L Tx power is low. 2-7 Names and Functions 2.3 Data terminalNDZ-227 This section describes the name of each part in the data terminal and the function. 2 3 4 5 6 1 1. Color liquid crystal display (LCD) unit 2. POWER lamp 7 This lamp lights to green while operating the data terminal, and blinks during the sleep. 3. READY lamp This lamp lights to green while serial communications are being normally done. And, when abnormality occurs, it turns off. 4. COMM lamp This lamp lights to green while communicating in ARQ or FEC mode. 5. DIM (Dimmer) key This key adjusts the brightness of the LCD screen and the lamp by four stages (high, middle, low, and off). 6. Connector for the USB memory with the water-proof rubber cap Pull out the rubber cap and connect the USB memory. 7. Keyboard 2-8 Names and Functions 2.4 Display of data terminal The content displayed on the LCD screen in the data terminal is different according to the situation. This section describes a regular screen, the telex communication screen, and the message file edit screen.

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S T - B Y R e p h a s i n g C a l l i n g R e c e i v e S T - B Y R e p e a t T r a f

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e T u n e r / T x . P O W E R 8 9 10 F r e e s i g . S c a n n i n g i n f o F i l e 1 2 3 4 5 2.4.1 Regular screen 6 7 M o v e t h e c u r s o r t o t h e i t e m y o u w a n t w i t h , , , t h e n p r e s s E n t e r . F i l e m a n a g e r . I n f o r m a t i o n : M E M K B D P R N U S B ( P r e s s t h e < A l t > + I i f y o u w a n t t o k n o w d e t a i l . ) 1. Indicates the Tx and Rx frequencies. 7. 2. Indicates the communication mode. 3. 4. 5. Indicates the main menu. When pressing the Enter key, indicates the drop-down menu of the main menu pointed by the cursor. Telex mode only. the conditions of Indicates communication. Telex mode only. the telex Indicates the scanning information in telex mode. When restarting scanning after sending a DSC Auto-ACK or powering off/on, indicates Running now instead of the detail information. Telex mode only. 6. Indicates the operation result such as the self-diagnosis. to the guide according Indicates the cursor position. Moreover, the locating faults are displayed if any errors occur.

Information: MEM Internal memory Information: KBD Keyboard control Information: PRN Printer Information: USB USB Memory 8. 9. Indicates that the connected USB memory is available. Additionally, ACS is shown if some time is needed to mount the USB memory. Indicates the antenna tuning condition.

READY

NOT READY Tuned Not tuned 10. Indicates the power reduction setting. 2-9

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B T E L E X T e r m i n a l W i n d o w A R Q C a l l i n g S e n d R e p h a s i n g R e p e a t T r a f Names and Functions 2 1 A R Q F r e e s i g . M e s s a g e s t a r t . 2.4.2 Telex communication screen 3 F 2 W R U | F 3 H e r e i s | F 4 T M S | F 5 O v e r | F 8 F . S e n d | F 1 0 S t o p Indicates the telex message or the name of the executed function key. Indicates the usable function keys guide. Each meaning is as follows.

F2 WRU Requests the answer-

the code back corresponding station. to

F3 Hereis Sends the answerback

F4 TMS Sends the date and the code of own station. time information.

F5 Over Exchange the sending receiving and the condition.

F6 POLL Acquires the sending right if the correspond-

(sending) ing station tries the communication in ARQ mode. finish to It is available only when the corresponding station is using the modem made of our company.

F8 F.Send Sends a message file.

F10 Stop Finishes telex the communication. 1. Indicates the operating condition of the telex communication from the left of each segment as follows. 1 In the autotelex mode, when the free channel signal of the coast station is detected, indicates the Free Sig. 2 Indicates the communication mode 2. 3.

(ARQ/CFEC/SFEC). Indicates ST-BY in the standby condition. 3 Indicates Calling at the master the slave station, and Called at station. 4 Indicates Send at the information sending station, and Receive at the information receiving station. the 5 Indicates "Phasing" while calling and connecting communication channel Rephasing while reconnecting the channel is disconnected due to the channel condition in ARQ mode. the channel after and 6 Indicates Repeat in ARQ mode if requested to send the each block or the control signal again. 7 Indicates Traf while sending or receiving information and RQ while sending or receiving RQ signal. 2-10 Names and Functions

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B MF E d i t i n g t e l e x f i l e : 0 0 1 . T L X L i n e : 1 C o l u m n : 1 S i z e : 0 I n s e r t O n HF 1 2

[ E n d o f F i l e ]

2.4.3 Message file edit screen 3 F 1 : I n s e r t O f f F 2 : I n s _ L i n e F 3 : B l o c k F 4 : D e l _ W o r d F 5 : D e l _ L i n e F 7 : Q u i t F 8 : S a v e A s F 9 : S a v e & Q u i t F 1 0 : - O t h e r s -

1. the edit screen as the state of Indicates follows.

Editing telex file File name

Line

Column

Size

Line position of cursor Row position of cursor Capacity of file Insert On/Overwrite Input mode (insert/overwrite) 2. The message file is edited here. 3. The list of the function key is displayed by the following content separately for two groups.

Group 1 F1 Insert On/Off F2 Ins_Line F3 Block F4 Del_Word F5 Del_Line F6 F7 Quit F8 Save As F9 Save & Quit F10 - Others -

Group 2 F1 Max Column F2 Set Tab F3 Undo_Char F4 Undo_Word F5 Undo_Line F6 Merge File F7 Find F8 Print out F9 Find/Replace F10 - Others -

2-11 Installation 3. INSTALLATION CAUTION To install this equipment, contact our service center or agents. Special knowledge on selecting the place where the antenna is to be mounted and setting the ID number (MMSI) assigned to the ship is required in addition to installing the equipment. 3-1 4. OPERATION Operation This chapter describes basic operations of the controller and the data terminal, radiotelephone communications, telex communications, DSC calling procedures, and other radio functions. 4.1 4.1.1 Operation of the controller Operation overview Basically, the controller is operated with the numeric keypad (10key), the MENU key, and the jog dial for other than the telex communication. The following is an overview of their operation.

When two controllers are connected, only one controller having the access right can operate the equipment except for sending a distress alert, changing audio volume, and changing display conditions. (Unless otherwise mentioned, the instructions below are for the controller with the access rights.) To obtain the access right at a controller without access rights, press ENT to get the access right unless the other controller is being operated (PTT/KEY ON or menu operations). The DISTRESS key is always available. (The DISTRESS key has the highest priority.)

On the status display or the operating display, the communication frequency or channel can be set by using the number keys or if the transceiver setting screen is focused on, setting it by rotating the jog dial is also available.

Pressing the TEL DSC or CW key changes the communication mode. If the screen displays in the menu, immediately shows the status display or the operating display, and also the channel input mode changes to the free frequency mode. Additionally, the communication mode can be changed to the AM mode to listen to the radio broadcasting or to the DATA mode to communicate using the intership fax

When the communication mode is set to TEL or CW, pressing the same communication mode key turns the PA on and off. (When the PA is on, ON mark appears.)

All functions can be accessed using the MENU key, jog dial, and the dedicated keys/controls.

(See the menu tree on the next page.) Further, screens in the menu tree indicated by

"Printable" can be printed from a printer connected to the controller or the data terminal by pressing and holding the FUNC key and then pressing the 7 P R N key.

Pressing or pressing and holding the FUNC (function) key and a number key allows rapid access to that function. There are two ways to access main menu items. After pressing the MENU key to display the main menu, use either the jog dial to move the cursor to the desired item and press ENT to select it, or select the item by pressing the respective number key. (Ex: For Self diagnosis

(6.1.1 Transceiver), press MENU6SP1CLAR1CLAR)

Any menu can be assigned to the USER key to open it with a single touch of a button.

Normally the key is always enabled.

Pressing the CH key changes the channel input mode to the User ch, ITU ch or to the free ANT TUNE frequency. This key is enabled when showing the status display or the operating display.

Pressing the CANCEL key in any menu moves the display up one level in the hierarchy (or to the status display). The same results can be achieved by selecting "0. Back" when available on-screen. Further, pressing the CANCEL key on an input line will clear the entered data.

Pressing the MENU key in any menu opens the main menu. Also, pressing MENU while in the main menu returns to the status display or the operating display.

Dialog boxes (popup screens) are opened when necessary and operations can be done in the dialog box.

When using DSC calls, to distinguish the messages or conditions, some specific alarms are provided as listed after the menu tree below. 4-1 Operation Menu tree Main Menu Hierarchical Menu 1 Hierarchical Menu 2 1. DSC non-distress call 2. DSC drobose call 3. Editing a distress msg 4. DSC logs 5. Radio operation 6. Maintenance 4.1 Received distress 4.2 Received others 4.3 Transmitted calls 5.1 User channel list (index) 5.2 ITU channel list (index) 5.3 Mode 5.4 Receiver 5.5 Transmitter 6.1 Self diagnosis 6.2 Alarm information 6.3 Software version 7.1 Date & time 7.2 POS/TIME 7.3 My controller 7.4 User channels (index) 7.5 DSC/WKR condition 7.6 Option 7. Setup 4-2

(Received message screen)

(Received message screen)

(Transmitted message screen) 5.1 User channel list (table) 5.2 ITU channel list (table) 5.4.1 Auto gain control 5.4.2 Noise reduction 5.4.3 Attenuation 5.4.4 Clarifier 5.4.5 Squelch 5.4.6 CW bandwidth 5.4.7 Scan 5.5.1 Power 5.5.2 Tune power 5.5.3 Auto tune start 6.1.1 Transceiver

(ATU/PA/TRX/WKR MODEM) 6.1.2 Controller/DTE 6.1.3 Transceiver log 6.1.4 Controller/DTE log 6.1.5 DSC/NBDP loop 6.1.6 Printout Alarm history 7.1.1 Date 7.1.2 Present time 7.1.3 Display form 7.2.1 Own position 7.2.2 UTC of position 7.3.1 LCD adjustment 1. Contrast 2. Dimmer 3. Screen saver 7.3.2 Sound 1. Operation 2. Notification level 3. Sidetone 7.3.3 User key assign 7.3.4 Tx meter 7.3.5 Data transfer 7.3.6 Menu shutdown 7.3.7 CH search ref 7.4 User channels (table) 7.5.1 Automatic ACK 1. Test call 2. Position RQ call 3. Polling call 4. Individual call 7.5.2 WKR scanning FRQ 7.5.3 DSC alarm setting 1. Safety/Routine RX ALM 2. Distress RX ALM 7.5.4 Medical use 7.5.5 Neutral use 7.5.6 Group-ID 7.5.7 Inactivity timeout 1. ACKed distress alert 2. RCVed other distress 3. Non-distress call 4. Other communications 7.5.8 DSC call list 7.6.1 Connection 7.6.2 Data out 7.6.3 Baudrate 7.6.4 Flow control 7.6.5 Print direction Shortcut Key MENU+1 ( R T N ) FUNC+0 ( Te s t ) MENU+2 MENU+3 FUNC+5 FUNC+3 FUNC+4 FUNC+1 FUNC+2 FUNC+9 FUNC+8 FUNC+6 ( S P ) Note Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable Printable DSC alarm specifications The following table summarizes the alarm characteristics when communicating particularly in the DSC mode. Operation Reason for the alarm Receiving a new distress event Acknowledging a received distress event Acknowledging a sent own distress event Receiving a new urgency event Acknowledging a sent urgency event Receiving a new safety or routine event Acknowledging a sent safety or routine event Receiving a DSC message pertinent to an ongoing event Pressing the dedicated distress button Sound Two tones of 2200Hz(250ms) and 1300Hz(250ms) Two tones of 2200Hz(500ms) and 1300Hz(500ms) Two tones of 2200Hz(500ms) and 1300Hz(500ms) Intermittent tones of 2200Hz(250ms) and silence(250ms) Intermittent tones of 2200Hz(500ms) and silence(500ms) Two tones of 784Hz(1s) and 392Hz(1s) Intermittent tones of 784Hz(1s) and silence(1s) Intermittent tones of 494Hz(100ms), silence(100ms) and 494Hz(1s) An intermittent tone of 2000Hz(500ms) and silence(500ms) Increase Yes Shutdown Manually No No Manually Manually Yes Manually No Manually Yes No No No Automatically

(10s) Automatically

(10s) Automatically

(1 cycle)

---

Note If receiving a DSC message with the ECC error, the alarm is stopped automatically. However if the same DSC messages are received repeatedly and the every error is corrected at last, the original alarm may be sounded. 4-3 Operation 4.1.2 Operation of the data terminal Basically, the every function concerning the telex mode such as ARQ/FEC communication or scanning can be operated from the data terminal. To connect and install the data terminal, setup the 7.6 Option menu of the controller. To set the communicate mode to the telex mode, press the Enter key of the keyboard. Additionally, that operation acquires the access right if the controller connected to that data terminal does not have the access right. Every function of the data terminal can be operated from the main menu displayed on a regular screen, excluding the screen of communication modes other than the telex, telex communicating screen, the telex file editing screen. Because the short-cut key to the table of next page is allocated in each item of the main menu or the drop down menu, it is possible to execute it easily according to few procedures. The guide of the item shown with the cursor is basically displayed under the screen in the data terminal. While displaying the menu screen on the controller, the data terminal cannot be operated temporally. Similarly, the controller cannot be operated during the telex communication except the operations of TEL DSC CW and DISTRESS keys. Besides the telex communication in ARQ/FEC mode, the data terminal has other functions such as editing telex messages and the station list, setup of the radio condition, or setup of the display color of the screen. The communication using ARQ mode can be started with a specific radio station by inputting the selcal number (ID) and the work frequency. The communication using CFEC mode can be started as the broadcasting by inputting the work frequency. The communication using SFEC mode can be started as the broadcasting for limited receivers by inputting the selcal number (group ID) and work frequency. The telex communication channel can be set by specifying ARQ or FEC in the DSC message. In this case, the telex communication may be started without inputting 9 digits selcal number

(ID) and work frequency because those have been already set by the DSC calling. Up to 20 stations can be registered in the station list. The self-diagnosis of the data terminal is executed from the controller as well as other units. The controller outputs the printing data from the printer connected to the data terminal. The condition of the data terminal such as the startup or the sleep is synchronized to the controller connected or the system. When the data terminal detects any error(s) concerning to the internal flash memory, the keyboard, the printer or the connected USB memory, immediately shows the popup screen and the Information is displayed on the bottom line on the screen until the error is fixed. 4-4 Menu tree in data terminal Main Menu File Tune Connect Service System Help Short-cut Key F T C S Y H Drop-down Key Edit new file Edit existing file Rename file Delete file Copy file Initialize USB Remove USB Frequency list ITU channel set Tx/Rx frequency set Tx tune Scanning start (stop) ARQ CALL AUTOTELEX CFEC SFEC Call logging history Station list Station database Destination list Sunspot number MUF calculation Clear status window Config Scan speed NBDP setup Short-cut Key N E R D C I U F C Q U S A C T F S C S D L N M R C S N Operation Remarks Printable Option Option Printable Printable Printable Option Software version 4-5 Operation 4.2 Basic communications procedure The following describes basic radio communication procedures. 4.2.1 Turning on the power CAUTION Do not turn off the equipment when at sea because the SOLAS Convention requires keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times. Always listen to 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz, and one or more of the following frequencies; 4207.5 kHz, 6312.0 kHz, 12577.0 kHz, or 16804.5 kHz. In class B mode, it is necessary to keep watch only on 2187.5 kHz. Procedure 111 ... Make sure the equipment is connected to a power source and turn on the breakers on the power supply.

The controller, transceiver and data terminal start the internal check.

After the check is finished correctly, the status display appears and becomes receiving condition (standby) on the receiving frequency showing. Note

- When turning on the controller or the PW R CONT equipment in sleep mode, press key for one second.

- Pressing key for 6 seconds makes the system reset to restart. PW R CONT

- When two controllers are connected, and one controller is turned on from sleep mode, the status display is displayed immediately without checking operations.

- The start screen of the data terminal

-

is as shown at right. If errors are detected during the operation check, the message is displayed. Please inform JRC or our agent of the error contents. 4-6 Operation 4.2.2 Turning off the power/ Putting into sleep mode CAUTION When completely turning off the power to the equipment, turn off the breakers on the power supply. Procedure Press the key and DIM key PW R CONT simultaneously. After that, the power-off process is activated according to the controllers' status.

When using only one controller Select the desired item below on the popup screen shown at right

[OK]:

Turns off the power. (Puts into sleep (energy saving) mode.)

[Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen.

When using two controllers On a controller with access rights, select the desired item below on the popup screen shown at right

[EQP]: Turns off the power. (Puts into sleep (energy saving) mode.)

[CTRL]: Puts the controller into sleep mode and gives access rights to another controller.

[Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen. On a controller without access rights, select the desired item below on the displayed popup screen at right

[OK]:

Puts one controller into sleep mode.

[Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 O K t o s l e e p t h e M F / H F e q u i p m e n t ?

[ O K ] [ C a n c e l ]

TX

[ O K ]

RX kHz S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 O K t o s l e e p t h e M F / H F e q u i p m e n t , o r o n l y t h i s c o n t r o l l e r ?

RX kHz S I G

[ E Q P ] [ C T R L ] [ C a n c e l ]

TX

[ E Q P ]

W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 O K t o s l e e p t h i s c o n t r o l l e r ?

[ O K ] [ C a n c e l ]

TX

[ O K ]

RX kHz S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

Note

In sleep mode, the equipment changes to the following statuses. If all the equipment goes to sleep, the ALM lamp lights green to indicate the DSC watch keeping receiver is on and operating. The POWER lamp of the data terminal blinks. If a distress or urgent DSC message is received, the equipment turns on automatically and sounds an alarm.

Turn off both the AC and DC breakers if turning off the power at the NBD-2250/2500 Power supply. 4-7 Operation 4.2.3 Communicating in radiotelephone mode Use the handset to communicate in radiotelephone mode. Procedure 111 ... When operating on a controller without access rights (OCC is displayed), press the jog dial to obtain the access rights. Unless the controller with access rights is being used, the access rights are acquired and the OCC display on the screen disappears. 222 ... Press the TEL key.

The communication mode is set to TEL and the previous frequency (or the default frequency at just after turning on) is set.

Pressing the TEL key again turns the power to the PA on and off.

If the power to the PA is on, ON is displayed as shown at right. 333 ... Set the frequency for making calls in radiotelephone mode. Note

- When setting a frequency, the screen becomes operating display as shown at right.

- The frequency is set on the receiving status in the status display or the operating display. For details, see

"4.3.1 Setting the communication frequencies" and "4.3.2 Setting the communication channels".

- See the frequency for making calls in the appendix "11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)". 444 ... Adjust the volume of the loudspeaker by turning the volume control. 555 ... Turn the RF GAIN control to an appropriate reception level. 4-8 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 kHz RX TX S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) I T U - 4 0 2 TEL 4360.0 4068.0 AA C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 4 3 6 0 . 0 / T x : 4 0 6 8 . 0 k H z T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

666 ... Press the key to tune the antenna. ANT TUNE Note

- T blinks if the transmission frequency is not tuned.

- Even if T is not displayed, tune the antenna before making a call. Operation

- T lights during tuning. It goes out after tuning. 777 ... Lift the handset from the cradle. 888 ... Press the PTT key to talk. The TX and ON marks appear on the screen to show the equipment is transmitting. Releasing the PTT key returns it to receiving. Note Pressing the PTT key turns on the power to the PA automatically. 999 ... When finished communicating, return the handset to the cradle. Making a radiotelephone call 111 ... Set a frequency the station to be called is monitoring. 222 ... Lift the handset from the cradle. 333 ... Press the PTT key, check that TX and ON are displayed and make a call as described below.

Say the name of the station being called ... Repeat 3 times.

Say "This is..."

Say own ship name ... Repeat 3 times.

If necessary, indicate your working frequency.

"over"

444 ... Release the PTT key to listen. 555 ... Start communicating according to the response. When changing frequencies, make sure that no other stations are using the indicated working channel. Note

- When transmitting from your own station, always press the PTT key while talking.

-

-

On a simplex channel, always say "over" just before releasing the PTT key. Always say "out" when terminating communications. 4-9 Operation 4.2.4 Communicating in CW mode Use a CW keyer to communicate in CW mode. Procedure 111 ... When operating on a controller without access rights (OCC is displayed), press the jog dial to obtain the access rights. Unless the controller with access rights is being used, the access rights are acquired and the OCC display on the screen disappears. 222 ... Press the CW key.

The communication mode is set to CW and the previous frequency (or the default frequency at just after turning on) is set.

Pressing the CW key again turns the power to the PA on and off.

If the power to the PA is on, ON is displayed as shown at right. 333 ... Set the frequency for making calls in CW I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) CW ITU- 401 4182.0 kHz 4182.0 RX kHz TX S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

mode. Note

- When setting a frequency, the screen becomes operating display as shown at right.

- The frequency is set on the receiving status in the status display. For details, see "4.3.1 Setting the communication frequencies" and

"4.3.2 Setting the communication channels".

- See the frequency for making calls in the appendix "11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)". 444 ... Adjust the volume of the loudspeaker by turning the volume control. 555 ... Turn the RF GAIN control to an appropriate reception level. 4-10 666 ... Press the key to tune the antenna. ANT TUNE Note

- T blinks if the transmission frequency is not tuned.

- Even if T is not displayed, tune the antenna before making a call.

- T lights during tuning. It goes out after tuning. 777 ... Communicate in CW mode using the CW keyer connected to the KEY jack on the controller as shown in the figure to the right. The TX and ON marks appear on the screen to show the equipment is transmitting. Note

- After keying on, turns on the PA power automatically.

- For the sidetone setting, see "5.3.2 Sound settings". Operation 4-11 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) T E L R x : 1 3 0 7 7 . 0 / T x : 1 2 2 3 0 . 0 k H z 5 ) R a d i o o p e r a t i o n 1 . U s e r c h a n n e l l i s t 1 . U s e r c h a n n e l l i s t 2 . I T U c h a n n e l l i s t 3 . M o d e : T E L 4 . R e c e i v e r 5 . T r a n s m i t t e r 0 . B a c k I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) T E L R x : 1 3 0 7 7 . 0 / T x : 1 2 2 3 0 . 0 k H z 5 ) R a d i o o p e r a t i o n 1 . U s e r c h a n n e l l i s t 2 . I T U c h a n n e l l i s t 3 . M o d e : T E L T E L 4 . R e c e i v e r 5 . T r a n s m i t t e r 0 . B a c k Operation 4.2.5 Receiving AM broadcasts It is possible to listen to the radio in AM mode. Procedure 111 ... When operating on a controller without access rights (OCC is displayed), press the jog dial to obtain the access rights. Unless the controller with access rights is being used, the access rights are acquired and the OCC display on the screen disappears. 222 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 5. Radio operation. 333 ... Move the cursor to 3. Mode, and press ENT. Move the cursor to the right as shown in the figure at right to select a communication mode. 444 ... Turn the jog dial to select AM, and press ENT. The communication mode is set to AM and the previous frequency (or the default frequency at just after turning on) is set. 555 ... Press the MENU key twice to return to the status display and if required, input an AM broadcast frequency using the numeric keys. Then press ENT to receive the broadcast. Note

- Adjust the reception level and volume by turning the VOL and RF GAIN knobs according to the reception conditions.

- The AM mode is for reception only so a transmission frequency is not shown. Additionally, if AM is selected during blinking T (ATU does not tuned), the condition remains even after changing to the AM mode. 4-12 Operation 4.2.6 Communicating in telex mode (TLX) When communicating in the telex mode, the data terminal is used. In the telex communication, the ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) mode and FEC (Forward Error Correction) mode are available to communicate between two stations and to broadcast respectively. Additionally in the FEC mode, there are two modes of the CFEC (Collective Forward Error Correction) mode for unspecified receivers and SFEC (Selective Forward Error Correction) mode for specified receivers, which are selectable according to the purpose. Attention After starting the telex communication, always use the data terminal until to stop it even though the controller can terminate that communication with END option forcibly. 44..22..66..11 ARQ mode operation To start the ARQ communication, make a call of the station by inputting the SELCAL number (4 digits for the coast station, 5 digits for the ship station or 9 digits) and the work frequency. After initiating the call, when receiving the response from the called station and the communication channel is established, the ARQ communication will be available. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used. 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect ARQ with Enter key.

The registered station list is displayed.

When selecting [Manual] on this station list, the ID and frequency or ITU channel can be input manually. 4-13 Operation 333 ... Select the station to be called with the cursor, and press Enter key.

The frequency list of the selected radio station is displayed.

If the position of the station is registered, the MUF (maximum usable frequency) is displayed in the lowest line as a reference to select the frequency. Also, the MUF can be calculated by the menu of Service MUF calculation. F r e q u e n c y l i s t N a m e : [ S t a t i o n 0 1 ] I D : [ 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 ] L o c : [ N 3 3 4 5 ' E 1 3 8 1 2 ' ]

1 4 2 0 2 . 5 4 2 0 2 . 5 N o . T x . F R x . F N o . T x . F R x . F 1 4 2 0 2 . 5 4 2 0 2 . 5 1 1 2 2 3 5 4 . 5 2 2 3 5 4 . 5 [ S e t ]

2 4 2 0 5 . 0 4 2 0 5 . 0 1 2 2 5 1 9 3 . 0 2 5 1 9 3 . 0 [ P r i n t ]

3 6 3 0 0 . 5 6 3 0 0 . 5 1 3 2 5 2 0 8 . 0 2 5 2 0 8 . 0 [ C a n c e l ]

4 6 3 0 3 . 0 6 3 0 3 . 5 1 4 5 8 3 9 6 . 5 8 3 9 6 . 5 1 5 6 8 3 9 9 . 0 8 3 9 9 . 0 1 6 7 1 2 5 6 0 . 0 1 2 5 6 0 . 0 1 7 8 1 6 7 8 5 . 0 1 6 7 8 5 . 0 1 8 9 1 8 8 9 3 . 0 1 8 8 9 3 . 0 1 9 1 0 2 2 3 5 2 . 0 2 2 3 5 2 . 0 2 0 M U F : 9 M H z , R a n g e : 2 5 3 7 M i l e s , S u n s p o t : 1 4 444 ... Select the work frequency with the cursor, and press Enter key.

The selected frequency is set and the antenna is tuned to the frequency.

The message as shown at right is displayed to confirm that the channel is busy. 555 ... Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency. Calling of the station is started with the ARQ mode.

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S T - B Y A R Q P h a s i n g C a l l i n g S e n d R e p e a t T r a f T u n e r / T x . P O W E R L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e F r e e s i g . S c a n n i n g i n f o

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

A R Q : 2 0 A U G , 2 0 1 0 1 7 : 1 5 S t a t i o n : [ S t a t i o n 0 1 ] I D : [ 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 ] L o c : [ N 3 3 4 5 ' E 1 3 8 1 2 ' ]

* W a i t i n g f o r t r a n s m i t t e r r e a d y 666 ... When receiving the periodic reply from the called station and the communication

* R e c e i v e d T X - R E A D Y s i g n a l F 1 0 S t o p channel is established, th e ARQ communication will be available.

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B S t a t i o n I D : [ 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 ]

T E L E X T e r m i n a l W i n d o w A R Q F r e e s i g . C a l l i n g S e n d A R Q R e p h a s i n g R e p e a t T r a f M e s s a g e s t a r t . F 2 W R U | F 3 H e r e i s | F 4 T M S | F 5 O v e r | F 8 F . S e n d | F 1 0 S t o p

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

If receiving no response within one minute, the calling will be ceased automatically. In this case, the same call is inhibited for about one minute. 4-14 Operation 777 ... The characters typed with the keyboard can be transmitted in sequence. And all of the characters displayed on the screen are printed out on the printer.

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B S t a t i o n I D : [ 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 ]

T E L E X T e r m i n a l W i n d o w A R Q F r e e s i g . C a l l i n g S e n d A R Q R e p h a s i n g R e p e a t T r a f M e s s a g e s t a r t . T H E Q U I C K B R O W N F O X J U M P S O V E R T H E L A Z Y D O G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 . T H E Q U I C K B R O W N F O X J U M P S O V E R T H E L A Z Y D O G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 . T H E Q U I C K B R O W N F O X J U M P S O V E R T H E L A Z Y D O G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 . T H E Q U I C K B R O W N F O X J U M P S O V E R T H E L A Z Y D O G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 . E N D O F T E S T F 2 W R U | F 3 H e r e i s | F 4 T M S | F 5 O v e r | F 8 F . S e n d | F 1 0 S t o p

In the ARQ mode, it is possible to alternate the information sending station

(ISS) and the information receiving station (IRS).

While Send is displayed on the segment that shows the operation status, the own station is ISS and able to send a message.

After sending a message, send +? to give the sending right to the IRS.

While the condition is IRS, the sending right can be acquired by pressing F5 Over without waiting for +? from ISS. Further, refer to the chapter 2 for other function keys.

Besides alphabets and the figures, following signs can be input from the keyboard.

- ? : ( ) . , = / +

Note: As the alphabets, capital letters only are available. 888 ... To finish the communication, press F10 Stop key.

When receiving the reply to the request for the end of communication, returns to the standby condition.

F10 Stop is always available while communicating regardless of ISS/ IRS. Note that if pressing the F10 key during IRS condition, the station becomes ISS temporally to send the end of communication.

When pressing the F10 Stop key during sending a message, the sending message buffer is cleared at once and initiates the end of communication process.

When POLL is set at IRS and the end of communication is requested by ISS, the IRS can acquire the sending right without ending the communication. Note When receiving the ARQ call from another station during standby condition, the operation under the communication is basically similar. 4-15 Operation 44..22..66..22 CFEC mode operation Sending with CFEC Messages can be sent as a broadcast on the selected work frequency using the CFEC mode. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used.

[ T E L ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e P r e s s E n t e r k e y t o g e t t h e a c c e s s r i g h t i n t h e N B D P m o d e . 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect CFEC with Enter key.

Input the frequency or ITU channel on the screen as shown at right.

To input the frequency, press Enter key to move the cursor to the right.

To input the ITU channel, select the ITU channel button and press Enter key to display the specific screen as shown at right. Then press Enter key to move the cursor to the right. 333 ... Input the work frequency or ITU channel, and press Enter key.

The selected frequency is set and the antenna is tuned to the frequency.

The message as shown at right is displayed to confirm that the channel is busy. 4-16 444 ... Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency. Operation Sending the phasing signal is started with the CFEC mode. 555 ... After sending the phasing signal for about 15 seconds, the message sending using the CFEC mode will be available. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 666 ... The characters typed with the keyboard can be transmitted in sequence. And all of the characters displayed on the screen are printed out on the printer.

Refer to the chapter 2 for the function key.

Besides alphabets and the figures, following signs can be input from the keyboard.

- ? : ( ) . , = / +

Note: Only the capital letter can be used for the alphabet. 4-17 Operation 777 ... To finish the communication, press F10 Stop key.

After sending the end of communication for about five seconds, returns to the standby condition.

When pressing the F10 Stop key during sending a message, the sending message buffer is cleared at once and initiates the end of communication process.

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S T - B Y R e p h a s i n g C a l l i n g R e c e i v e S T - B Y R e p e a t T r a f F r e e s i g . S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e C F E C : 2 0 A U G , 2 0 1 0 1 7 : 1 5

* W a i t i n g f o r t r a n s m i t t e r r e a d y

* R e c e i v e d T X - R E A D Y s i g n a l M o v e t h e c u r s o r t o t h e i t e m y o u w a n t w i t h , , , t h e n p r e s s E n t e r . F i l e m a n a g e r . Receiving CFEC broadcasting CFEC broadcasting messages can be received on the selected work frequency. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used.

[ T E L ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e P r e s s E n t e r k e y t o g e t t h e a c c e s s r i g h t i n t h e N B D P m o d e . 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Tune Tx/Rx frequency set with Enter key.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

To input the frequency, press Enter key to move the cursor to the right.

To select the frequency from the frequency list, select Tune Frequency list and open the frequency list of either one of radio stations. 4-18 333 ... Input the receiving frequency of the CFEC broadcasting, and press Enter key. Operation The antenna is tuned to the frequency and the message as shown at right is displayed. Note The transmitting frequency is set simultaneously by the above procedure, but in this case the frequency is meaningless. So selecting Yes and pressing Enter would be right. 444 ... When receiving the phasing signal, initiates the CFEC receiving condition. The segment of the operation status shows receiving the phasing signal. 555 ... When receiving the message start code (the carriage return and the line feed), initiates the message reception.

All of the characters displayed on the screen are printed out on the printer.

If detected the character error, the error correction with the time-diversity is performed, but upon the channel quality, the error would be beyond the capacity and the error code

(asterisk) would be displayed.

To finish the reception, press F10 Stop key. Note that, if receiving the phasing signal continuously, the CFEC receiving would be restarted just after finishing. Note

-

If the "Collective FEC receiving setting (System NBDP setup) is off, neither the CFEC broadcasting nor the SFEC broadcasting are received.

- Receiving the CFEC broadcasting can be started even if on the way of the message because the phasing signal would be interrupted for every 100 characters. Afterwards, the reception of the message starts as soon as detecting the message start code (the carriage return and the line feed). 4-19 Operation 44..22..66..33 SFEC mode operation Messages can be sent to the specific stations as a broadcast on the selected work frequency using the SFEC mode. Additionally, regarding the SFEC reception, refer to the previous section because it is similar to the CFEC reception. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used.

[ T E L ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e P r e s s E n t e r k e y t o g e t t h e a c c e s s r i g h t i n t h e N B D P m o d e . 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect SFEC with Enter key.

The registered station list is displayed.

When selecting [Manual] on this station list, the ID and frequency or ITU channel can be input manually. 1 S t a t i o n 0 1 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 N 3 3 4 5 ' E 1 3 8 1 2 ' D O T D O T S t a t i o n s e l e c t i o n N o . S t a t i o n N a m e I D L o c a t i o n F . S i g 1 S t a t i o n 0 1 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 N 3 3 4 5 ' E 1 3 8 1 2 ' D O T D O T [ S e l e c t ]

2 S t a t i o n 0 2 0 0 4 3 1 1 2 3 4 N 3 7 2 2 ' E 1 3 5 5 1 ' D O T D O T [ M a n u a l ]

3 S t a t i o n 0 3 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 [ C a n c e l ]

4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 333 ... Select the station to be called with the cursor, and press Enter key.

The frequency list of the selected radio station is displayed.

If the position of the station is registered, the MUF (maximum usable frequency) is displayed in the lowest line as a reference to select the frequency. Also, the MUF can be calculated by the menu of Service MUF calculation. 4-20 444 ... Select the work frequency with the cursor, and press Enter key. Operation

The selected frequency is set and the antenna is tuned to the frequency.

The message as shown at right is displayed to confirm that the channel is busy. 555 ... Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency.

The SFEC broadcasting is started.

First, the phasing signal same with CFEC mode is sent. 666 ... After sending the phasing signal followed by the SELCAL number, the message sending using the SFEC mode will be available. The screen as shown at right is displayed.

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B S t a t i o n I D : [ 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 ]

T E L E X T e r m i n a l W i n d o w A R Q F r e e s i g . C a l l i n g S e n d S F E C R e p h a s i n g M e s s a g e s t a r t . F 3 H e r e i s | F 4 T M S | F 8 F . S e n d | F 1 0 S t o p Note The following procedure is the same as the CFEC mode. R e p e a t R Q 4-21 Operation 44..22..66..44 Editing telex messages When communicating in the telex mode, the message file can be sent, which is prepared beforehand as follows. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used.

[ T E L ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e P r e s s E n t e r k e y t o g e t t h e a c c e s s r i g h t i n t h e N B D P m o d e . 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select File Edit new file with Enter key.

The editing screen is displayed as shown at right.

To edit an existing file, select File Edit existing file.

[ T L X ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B E d i t i n g t e l e x f i l e : 0 0 1 . T L X L i n e : 1 C o l u m n : 1 S i z e : 0 I n s e r t O n

[ E n d o f F i l e ]

333 ... Make the message with the keyboard. F 1 : I n s e r t O f f F 2 : I n s _ L i n e F 3 : B l o c k F 4 : D e l _ W o r d F 5 : D e l _ L i n e F 7 : Q u i t F 8 : S a v e A s F 9 : S a v e & Q u i t F 1 0 : - O t h e r s -

Besides alphabets and the figures, following signs can be input from the keyboard.

- ? : ( ) . , = / +

Only the capital letter can be used for the alphabet.

When the number of characters for each line becomes more than 70 or a specified number, line feed is automatically inserted.

When pressing the Tab key, inserts the space of the number set by F2 Set tab is inserted. 444 ... Press F9 (Save & Quit) key when saving the message the file and finishing editing. After closing the editing screen, returns to the regular screen. 4-22 Operation Note

-

The function keys available for the edit screen and the content are as follows. Group 1 F1 Insert On/Off Sets the input condition to the insert mode by pressing it while Insert On is displayed. And sets the input condition to the overwrite mode by pressing it while Insert Off is displayed. Current conditions are indicated on the upper-right corner of the screen. F2 Ins_Line Add a line to the line of the cursor position. F3 Block Indicates the following block menu. Top-marker of block:

Specifies the cursor position for a starting point of the block. Bottom-marker of block:

Specifies the cursor position for a ending point of the block. Remove markers:

Releases the specification of the block. Copy Block:

Copies and pastes the character string specified in the block onto the cursor position. Move block:

Moves the character string specified in the block to the line position of the cursor. Delete block:

Deletes the character string specified in the block. Go to the block:

Moves the cursor to the starting point of the block. F4 Del_Word Deletes the word at the cursor position. F5 Del_Line Deletes the line at the cursor position. F6 N/A F7 Quit Finishes editing without saving the message file. F8 Save As Saves the message file with the new name. F9 Save & Quit Saves the message file by overwriting and finishes editing. F10 - Others - Assigns the group 2 to the function keys. Group 2 F1 Max Column Specifies the column width of a line. F2 Set Tab Specifies the tab position on the edit screen. F3 Undo_Char F4 Undo_Word F5 Undo_Line Insert the character erased at the end to the cursor position. Insert the word erased with F4 Del_Word to the cursor position. Insert the line erased with F5 Del_Line to the line of the cursor position. F6 Merge File Selects an existing message file to merge to the message file under the edit. F7 Find Searches a specified character string. F8 Print_out Prints the message file under the edit. F9 Find/Replace Searches a specified character string and replaces it with another character string. F10 - Others - Assigns the group 1 to the function keys. 4-23

- Besides editing messages mentioned above, the following items in the file menu concerning to the message files are available. Rename file Changes the name of the file saved in flash ROM(C:) or USB memory (A:) . Delete file Deletes the file saved in the flash ROM (C:) or the USB memory (A:) . Copy file Copies a file (32kB or less) saved in the flash ROM (C:) or the USB memory (A:) to another folder or drive. Initialize USB Formats the attached USB memory (A:) . Remove USB Unmounts the USB drive (A:) to remove the attached USB memory.

-

-

The maximum size of the message file is 8192 bytes. The maximum number of the message files saved in the TEXT folder is one hundred.

- When naming or renaming a filename, the space character is unavailable for the character string. Operation 4-24 Operation 4.3 Setting the radio This section describes how to set the communication frequencies and how to use the receiver and transceiver functions. 4.3.1 Setting the communication frequencies Use the free frequency input mode to input the communication frequencies directly. Procedure 111 ... In the status display, use the numeric keypad to input the frequency. Note

- When 1 is input using the numeric

-

keypad, it appears on the far right as shown in the screen on the right. In the user/ITU channel input mode, press the CH key once or twice to hide the channel display. 222 ... Input numbers to the 0.1 kHz place and press ENT. The transmission frequency input mode opens as shown in the screen at right. Note For a simplex frequency, press ENT to automatically input the same frequency as the receiving frequency to complete communication frequency settings. 333 ... Input the transmission frequency in the same way as the reception frequency. 444 ... Input numbers to the 0.1 kHz place and press ENT. The communication frequency settings are complete and the screen shows the operating display. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL RX

-----.1 2331.5 TX kHz kHz S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 12345.0 RX

-----.-

TX kHz kHz S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 12345.0 RX

---12.3 TX kHz kHz S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 12345.0 12345.0 AA C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 1 2 3 4 5 . 0 / T x : 1 2 3 4 5 . 0 k H z T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note

- Turning the jog dial on the status display changes the reception frequency on the 0.1 kHz scale. For simplex frequencies, the transmission frequency is changed at the same time.

- The above operation is also available on the transceiver setting screen of the operating display.

- The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode. The telex frequency is set with the menu of the data terminal, as Tune Tx/Rx frequency set. 4-25 Operation 4.3.2 Setting the communication channels Besides the free frequencies described previously, ITU channel mode and user channel modes can also be set. The ITU channel mode is mode for using channels based on the international standard and is built-in to the equipment. The user channel mode is the mode for using channels on pre-registered frequencies. These modes can be used according to the operations.

(1) Selecting a frequency and channel input mode Procedure 111 ... Set the screen of the status display or the operating display. The operating display at right shows free frequency mode. 222 ... Press the CH key. As shown below, each time the CH key is pressed the mode changes in order from the free frequency mode, ITU channel mode, to the user channel mode. CH CH

(Free frequency input mode) I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) I T U - 4 0 2 TEL 4360.0 4068.0 AA C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 4 3 6 0 . 0 / T x : 4 0 6 8 . 0 k H z T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

(ITU channel mode) CH I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) U 0 1 - 0 0 1 TEL 4357.0 4065.0 AA C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 4 3 5 7 . 0 / T x : 4 0 6 5 . 0 k H z T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

(User channel mode) Note

-

If changed to the ITU channel mode, the communication mode of the free frequency input mode and the previous (or lowest) ITU channel number are applied.

- The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode.

-

If the communication mode is changed by pressing the TEL, DSC, or CW keys, the free frequency input mode is set. 4-26

(2) Setting the ITU channels Procedure 111 ... After setting the TEL, DSC or CW modes, press the CH key to set the display to the ITU channel mode. 222 ... Input the channel by using the numeric keypad. Note When 4 is input using the numeric keypad, it appears on the far right as shown in the screen on the right. 333 ... Input the rest of the digits and press ENT. The input ITU channel frequency is displayed and the settings are complete. Operation I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) 4 I T U -

TEL 4360.0 4068.0 AA C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 4 3 6 0 . 0 / T x : 4 0 6 8 . 0 k H z T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) I T U - 4 0 1 TEL 4357.0 4065.0 AA C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 4 3 5 7 . 0 / T x : 4 0 6 5 . 0 k H z T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note

- See the appendix "11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)" for a list of pre-installed ITU channels and their frequencies.

- Besides doing settings with the numeric keypad, settings can also be done with the jog dial.

- For DSC mode, normally perform the above procedure to receive the routine message. Furthermore, when sending a DSC message, the calling frequency is set via the menu automatically and the above procedure is not needed.

- The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode. The ITU channel in the telex mode is set with the controller menu 5.2 ITU channel list, or the data terminal menu operation, as Tune ITU channel set. 4-27 Operation

(3) Setting user channels A total of 20 groups with 20 channels set to each group (i.e. 400 channels) can be registered on the equipment. This section explains how to set channels that are already registered. Procedure 111 ... Use the CH key to set the display to the user channel mode status display. 222 ... Pressing ENT causes the channel group number to blink so a channel group can be input. Use the numeric keypad or jog dial to input the number of a registered group. Note When 2 is input using the numeric keypad, it appears on the far right as shown in the screen on the right. 333 ... After inputting a group number, pressing ENT causes the channel number to blink so a user channel can be input. Use the numeric keypad or jog dial to input the number of a registered channel. Note When 3 is input using the numeric keypad, it appears on the far right as shown in the screen on the right. 444 ... Input the rest of the digits and press ENT.

The input user channel frequency is displayed and the settings are complete.

The group name is displayed for 3 seconds after the settings are done. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) 3 U 2 0 -

TEL 4357.0 4065.0 AA C o m m u n i c a t i n g o n T E L R x : 4 3 5 7 . 0 / T x : 4 0 6 5 . 0 k H z T i p ) U s e F U N C t o c h a n g e o p a r e a .

[ H L D ] [ E N D ]

4-28 Note

- Channels can be set directly in the status display or the operating display by using the numeric keypad or the jog dial without setting a channel group. After inputting with the numeric keypad, press ENT.

- See "5.4 Registering user channels" for how to register frequencies to user channels.

- The user channel of the telex mode is set with the menu of the data terminal, as Tune Frequency list.

(4) Using channel lists Besides the procedure above, user channels (except the telex mode) and ITU channels can also be set from the channel lists (5.1 User channel list or 5.2 ITU channel list). This section explains how to set channels that are already registered from the user channel list. Operation Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 5. Radio operation. 222 ... Select 1. User channel list and press ENT. The user channel list index (group list) as shown at right is displayed. 333 ... Select the intended channel group and press ENT. The user channel list as shown at right is displayed. 444 ... Select the channel to set and press ENT. The user channel settings are complete, the status display is displayed. 5) Radio operation 1.User channel list 2.ITU channel list 3.Mode :TEL 4.Receiver 5.Transmitter 0.Back Type Pacific ABC 5.1)User channel list (index) No CH group name 01 JRC Tokyo TEL 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 CW 5.1)User channel list (table) Name: JRC Tokyo Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz]

Mode 001 4357.0 4065.0 TEL 002 003 004 005 006 4360.0 4363.0 4366.0 4369.0 4372.0 4068.0 4071.0 4074.0 4077.0 4080.0 TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL 4-29 Operation Setting the automatic gain control (AGC) 4.3.3 Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 5.4 Receiver. 222 ... Select 1. Auto gain control and press ENT, when the cursor moves to the right use the jog dial to select Slow, Fast, or OFF. After selecting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Fast 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back Note The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the 5AGC key at the same time. 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :NR1 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back Setting the noise reduction (NR) 4.3.4 Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver appears, move the cursor to 2. Noise reduction. 222 ... Press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial to select NR1, NR2, BC, or OFF. After selecting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. Note

- The various settings are shown below. NR1 Noise reduction (low) NR2 Noise reduction (high) BC Beat canceller

- The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the 3NR key at the same time.

- This function is invalid in DSC mode or telex mode. Moreover, the beat canceller becomes invalid in CW mode. 4-30 Setting the attenuation (ATT) 4.3.5 Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver appears, move the cursor to 3. Attenuation. 222 ... Press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial to select 6dB, 12dB, 18dB, or OFF. After selecting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. Operation 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :6dB 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back Note The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the 4ATT key at the same time. Setting the clarifier 4.3.6 Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver appears, move the cursor to 4. Clarifier. 222 ... Press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial or numeric keypad to select a value in the range of -200 to +200 Hz. After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. Note

- When using the numeric keypad, input "+" with the 1CLAR key and "-"

with the 2SCAN key.

- Pressing and holding the FUNC key and the 1CLAR key at the same time opens a popup screen. The same settings can be done here.

- This function is invalid in the DSC mode or the telex mode. 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+008Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 4-31 Operation Setting the squelch level 4.3.7 Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver appears, move the cursor to 5. Squelch. 222 ... Press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial or numeric keypad to input a value in the range of 000 to 100. After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. Note

- Setting the value to 000 automatically displays it as OFF.

- This function is invalid in the DSC mode or the telex mode. 4.3.8 Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through Setting the CW bandwidth hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver appears, move the cursor to 6. CW bandwidth. 222 ... Press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial to select Wide or Narrow. After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. Note This function is enabled in CW mode only. 4-32 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :012 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back 4.3.9 Scanning the Rx frequencies Scanning of channels in TEL/DSC/CW mode The scanning of channels in the TEL/DSC/CW mode is started with the controller. Operation Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver appears, move the cursor to 7. Scan. 222 ... Press ENT to confirm the selection. The group list as shown at right is displayed. Note

- The previous scan can be restarted by pressing and holding the FUNC key and then pressing the 2SCAN key on the status display. If the user channel is not registered, scan cannot be done so the screen shown at right is not displayed. 333 ... Select the channel group to scan with the

-

cursor and press ENT. The popup screen as shown at right is displayed. Note If the popup screen shown at right is displayed during scanning, Stop appears instead of Execute. 444 ... Select 1. Execute and press ENT, the screen at right is displayed and scanning starts.

To check the registered channels in the channel group, select 2. User channel list and press ENT.

To change the scanning speed, select 3. Scan speed (sec) and press ENT. The setting range is 0.3 to 9.9 seconds, the same as TEL/DSC/CW. 5.4)Receiver 1.Auto gain control :Slow 2.Noise reduction :OFF 3.Attenuation :OFF 4.Clarifier :+000Hz 5.Squelch :OFF 6.CW bandwidth :Narrow 7.Scan 0.Back Type TEL CW Pacific ABC 5.4.7)Scan No CH group name 01 JRC Tokyo 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Type 1. Execute 2. User channel list Pacific ABC 3. Scan speed (sec) TEL DSC 3.0 0.3 5.4.7)Scan No CH group name 01 JRC Tokyo TEL 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 CW 3.0 CW I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) J R C T o k y o U 0 1 - 0 0 1 TEL 4357.0 RX

-----.-

TX kHz kHz S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

Note

- Scanning can be done regardless of the squelch being set to open or close. When pressing the PTT or keying the CW keyer, or when squelch is opened after closing condition, scanning stops momentarily and the icon starts blinking. In this case the scanning can be restarted by pressing ENT.

- To stop scanning, press the CANCEL key.

- When scanning to receive routine DSC calls, set the scan speed to 0.3 seconds within 6 channels. Note: If too many channels are being scanned, it may not catch the reception. 4-33 Operation Scanning of channels in telex mode The scanning of channels in the telex mode is started with the data terminal. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used.

[ T E L ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e P r e s s E n t e r k e y t o g e t t h e a c c e s s r i g h t i n t h e N B D P m o d e . 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Tune Scanning start with Enter key. The registered station list is displayed. 333 ... Select the radio station having the channel group to be scanned with the cursor, and press Enter key. The antenna is tuned to the every frequency registered in the selected radio station. The screen at right is displayed while tuning the antenna. 444 ... After completing the antenna tuning, scanning starts.

The screen as shown at right is displayed while scanning.

When receiving a call by the ARQ or FEC mode, scanning stops and the communication starts. After finishing the communication, scanning restarts automatically.

The scanning speed can be changed with the menu on the regular screen, as System Scan speed.

When breaking the scanning, select Tune Scanning stop. 4-34

[ T L X ] T x = - - - - - . - k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S T - B Y R e p h a s i n g C a l l i n g R e c e i v e R e p e a t S T - B Y T r a f F r e e s i g . S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R N o . S t a t i o n : [ S t a t i o n 0 1 ] I D : [ 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 ] T U N E R : [ - - - - - ]

0 1 L o c a t i o n : [ N 3 3 4 5 ' E 1 3 8 1 2 ' ] F . S i g : [ D O T D O T ] T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e M o v e t h e c u r s o r t o t h e i t e m y o u w a n t w i t h , , , t h e n p r e s s E n t e r . F i l e m a n a g e r . Reducing the Tx power 4.3.10 Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 5.5 Transmitter. 222 ... Select 1. Power and press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial to select Medium or Low. After selecting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. Operation 5.5)Transmitter 1.Power :High 2.Tune power 3.Auto tune start :ON 0.Back

:Normal 5.5)Transmitter 1.Power 2.Tune power 3.Auto tune start :ON 0.Back

:Low

:Normal Note

- The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the 9 key at the same time. PW R RDC

- When the Tx power is reduced, M or L is displayed on the screen. Setting the antenna tuning power 4.3.11 Procedure On the 5.5 Transmitter menu mentioned above, select the 2. Tune power and press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then select a value from 0 to 3 with the jog dial.

The antenna tune output grows larger by about 5W step.

The factory default setting is 0 (Normal).

After selecting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete. Setting the Auto Tune Start (ATS) function 4.3.12 Procedure On the 5.5 Transmitter menu mentioned above, select the 3. Auto tune start and press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then set to ON or OFF with the jog dial.

After setting to ON, when pressing the PTT key under the following condition in TEL mode, the antenna tuner starts tuning automatically.

- When the Tx frequency is untuned, or

- when the PA power is not turned on, i.e. the ON is not displayed.

This ATS setting data is saved in the controller. Therefore if two controllers are connected, this function can be set to the controllers respectively. 4-35 Operation 4.4 Basic DSC operations When calling stations, the DSC is also available for a routine, safety, urgency call, or a distress alert. This section describes basics of how to use the DSC to make routine calls. 4.4.1 Routine calls to an individual station For radiotelephone or telex communication, a DSC routine call to the station to be called can be made as follows. Procedure 111 ... On the status display or operation display, 1)DSC non-distress call holding down the MENU key, press 1CLAR key to open 1. DSC non-distress call. The screen as shown at right is displayed. The calling FRQ of 2177.0 kHz is the prescribed default value. But the working FRQ (MF) is rewritable. Note If no data is shown in the working FRQ field just after turning on, please contact JRC or our agency to register the nonvolatile data. In this case, the input MF data is stored temporarily as the volatile data. 222 ... Input the destination address.

-

-

If inputting the 9 digits MMSI manually, use the numeric keypad or the jog dial, or If the DSC call list is already prepared, press ENT to open the station list as shown at right and select the receiver from the list. 333 ... The cursor is focused on the Call. To make a call without changing the parameters, press ENT.

- To change the DSC calling frequency, select the Calling FRQ and press ENT to open the DSC call list as shown at right, if already prepared. But in this case if inputting manually, press CANCEL key to close the list and, input the proper DSC frequencies in conformity with regulations.

- After changing the DSC calling frequency on HF, the working frequency is automatically selected within upto 10 seconds. However if no frequency is detected or if another frequency is needed, manually inputting the frequency is also available.

- To check the details of the message, press ENT on the Preview menu to open the screen as shown at right (bottom). 4-36 Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

Address Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

:[ ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

No Station name 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 JRC MITAKA1 JRC MITAKA2 JRC MITAKA3 JRC MITAKA4 JRC MITAKA5 JRC MITAKA6 JRC MITAKA7 MMSI 123456789 431012345 431123456 431234567 431000123 004310014 431888888 1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

Address :[123456789]

Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

JRC MITAKA1 123456789 No RX[kHz] TX[kHz] Category 01 02 03 04 05 06 2177.0 4208.0 4208.5 4209.0 6313.0 6313.5 2177.0 4208.0 4208.5 4209.0 6313.0 6313.5 RTN RTN RTN RTN RTN RTN 1)DSC non-distress call Format :Individual Address :123456789 Category :Routine Self-ID :431001234 Telecommand1:Radiotelephone Telecommand2:No information Working FRQ :Tx 2150.0kHz Rx 2150.0kHz

[Call] [Return] [Cancel]

444 ... The operating display is appeared and initiates the DSC call. After checking the channel free condition, sends the message and waits for the acknowledgement. Note During waiting for the acknowledgement, the handling menus are available for the following purposes. Note) To focus the cursor on it, use FUNC key to move the active screen area. Operation I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2177.0 2177.0 A A T x T O : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N W a i t i n g f o r C H f r e e C a l l - F : R x 2 1 7 7 . 0 / T x 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

INF ...... Indicates the message contents.

- RTRY ... Resends the message.

-

- HLD ..... Makes the event on hold.

- END .... Terminates the event. 555 ... When receiving the acknowledgement the ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving alarm gradually grows louder.

Pressing CANCEL key or ENT silences the alarm.

The radiotelephone frequency is set and the antenna is tuned automatically. 666 ... When requested the radiotelephone communication, start the communication with the handset. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2177.0 2177.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N | A C K A c k n o w l e d g e d ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) R x F R Q : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z P r e s s C A N C E L t o s i l e n c e a l a r m . I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2150.0 2150.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N | A C K R e a d y t o t a l k ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z

[ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note

-

- After completing the routine individual call where the ARQ or FEC is specified, the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be started with the data terminal. If the MMSI of the coast station is input at Address, the working frequency is specified by the coast station. Thus the Working FRQ line is disappeared. If the receiver is unable to comply with the call, own station may receive one of the following acknowledgements. (* are coast stations only) In this case, wait and retry the call again later, if possible, according to the message.

-

No reason/ No reason given Congestion/ Congestion at maritime switching centre *

Busy/ Busy Queue/ Queue indication Barred/ Station barred No operator/ No operator available Temp no operator/ Operator temporarily unavailable EQP disabled/ Equipment disabled Unable FRQ/ Unable to use proposed channel Unable mode/ Unable to use proposed channel 4-37 Operation 4.4.2 Receiving routine individual calls When receiving an individual DSC call from a coast or ship station, according to the message, perform the following procedures as appropriate. Procedure 111 ... The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.

The example message contains the following information.

- Message type: Routine individual call

- Caller's MMSI: 123456789

If no procedure exists, starts operating the received message automatically. 222 ... Press the CANCEL key or ENT to stop the alarm, then the screen at right is displayed. 333 ... Press FUNC key or ENT to move the focused screen to the operation control screen and select the option to handle the procedure. Options shown at right are as follows. ACK ....... Sends the acknowledgement. NCK Sends a reply as unable to comply. Note) Select the unable reason on the popup screen at right. NEW ...... Sends acknowledgement with a new channel. INF ........ Indicates the receiving message. HLD ....... Makes the procedure on hold. END ...... Terminates the procedure. 444 ... When sending the acknowledgement for communication, select ACK and press ENT.

Instead of selecting ACK, lifting the handset from the cradle is also available.

The equipment waits for the channel free condition as shown at right. After checking it, the acknowledgement is sent immediately. 4-38 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2177.0 2177.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 3 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z P r e s s C A N C E L t o s i l e n c e a l a r m . I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2177.0 2177.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 3 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z

[ A C K ] [ N C K ] [ N E W ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2177.0 2177.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 3 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z

[ A C K ] [ N C K ] [ N E W ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

[ A C K ]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2177.0 2177.0 A A T x T O : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N | A C K W a i t i n g f o r C H f r e e C a l l - F : R x 2 1 7 7 . 0 / T x 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

555 ... After sending an acknowledgement, the working frequency is set to communicate. In TEL mode, start communicating using the handset. Operation I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2150.0 2150.0 A A T x T O : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | R T N | A C K A c k n o w l e d g e d ( 0 0 . 5 m i n ) C a l l - F : R x 2 1 7 7 . 0 / T x 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note

- After completing the DSC call sequence specifying the ARQ or FEC, the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be started with the data terminal.

-

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) If the receiving call is not the above mentioned call which requests TEL or TLX communication but a polling call, the screen as follows is shown and, the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually. In this case, after silencing the alarm, select ACK to acknowledge it. Additionally note that if it is received while the 7.5.1.3 Polling call of the Automatic ACK menu is set to ON, and there is no active procedure, this call can be acknowledged automatically. DSC 2177.0 2189.5 R x I D : 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | I N D | R T N P O L L W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 5 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z

[ A C K ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

A A 4-39 Operation 4.4.3 Routine group calls For radiotelephone or FEC broadcasting, a DSC routine call to a group of ships is available. Procedure 111 ... On the menu 1. DSC non-distress call 1)DSC non-distress call mentioned above, set the Call type on the menu shown at right to RTN/Group/TEL or RTN/Group/FEC. 222 ... Input the Address, and frequency if required. And then press ENT on the Call to start sending the group call. 333 ... After finishing the transmission, the working frequency is set immediately. In TEL mode, start broadcasting using the handset. Call type :[RTN/Group/TEL ]

Address Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

:[ ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[RTN/Group/TEL ]

Address Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

:[012345678]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2150.0 2150.0 A A T x T O : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | G R P | R T N R e a d y f o r b r o a d c a s t ( 0 0 . 5 m i n ) C a l l - F : R x 2 1 7 7 . 0 / T x 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R x - - - - - . - / T x 2 1 5 0 . 0 k H z

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note After completing the group call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be started with the data terminal. Receiving routine group calls 4.4.4 Procedure The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually. If no procedure exists, starts operating the received message, i.e. the specified working frequency is set automatically. Then press CANCEL to silence alarm and listen to the broadcasting. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2150.0 2150.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | G R P | R T N R e a d y f o r l i s t e n i n g ( 0 0 . 5 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z T E L : R X 2 1 5 0 . 0 / T X - - - - - . - k H z

[ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note When receiving the group call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then receive the telex broadcasting with the data terminal. 4-40 Operation 4.5 Emergency calls (DSC distress/urgency/safety calls) In emergency, the DSC is available for distress, urgency, or safety calls. For safety and urgency calls, either individual calls or area calls is selectable for the type of call. For distress alerts, either sending after entering the nature of distress or frequency, or not entering anything is available. In both cases, pressing the DISTRESS key is required to send the distress alert. Safety or urgency calls to an individual station 4.5.1 Procedure The procedure to send the safety or urgency individual call is similar to the routine call except selecting the call type to SAF/Indv/TEL or URG/Indv/TEL (instead of TEL, ARQ or FEC also available) and normally using the distress and safety frequencies prior to other frequencies. 1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[SAF/Indv/TEL ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

Note

- Both calls of the safety test and the safety position request are described below.

- When calling a coast station with requesting the working frequency, input 0 in the Tx and Rx frequency input field to send the own position data. 44..55..11..11 Special safety individual calls

(1) Safety test calls Procedure 111 ... Select SAF/Indv/Test in the Call type field and input address. Also change the Calling FRQ if needed. 222 ... Press ENT on the Call to start sending the safety test call. After checking the channel free, the safety test call is sent and the screen at right is displayed. 1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[SAF/Indv/Test ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2187.5 2187.5 A A T x T O : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | S A F T e s t W a i t i n g f o r A C K ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) C a l l - F : R x 2 1 8 7 . 5 / T x 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

4-41 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2187.5 2187.5 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | S A F T e s t | A C K A c k n o w l e d g e d ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z

[ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[SAF/Indv/PosRQ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2187.5 2187.5 A A T x T O : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | S A F P O S W a i t i n g f o r A C K ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) C a l l - F : R x 2 1 8 7 . 5 / T x 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2187.5 2187.5 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | S A F P O S | A C K A c k n o w l e d g e d ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z P o s i t i o n : 2 1 2 8 ' N / 1 5 7 5 9 ' W

[ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Operation 333 ... When the acknowledgement is received, the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder. After silencing it with CANCEL key, the screen becomes as shown at right. The safety test call process is now complete. However note that even though the call is sent normally, the acknowledgement may not be received from the called station for some reason.

(2) Safety position request calls Procedure 111 ... Select SAF/Indv/PosRQ in the Call type field and input address. Also change the Calling FRQ if needed. 222 ... Press ENT on the Call to start sending the safety position request call. After checking the channel free, the safety position request call is sent and the screen at right is displayed. 333 ... When the acknowledgement is received, the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder. After silencing it with CANCEL key, the screen becomes as shown at right. The position data of the station is indicated in the Position field usually, and this procedure is complete. However note that even though the call is sent normally, the acknowledgement may not be received from the called station for some reason. 4-42 4.5.2 Receiving safety or urgency individual calls Operation When receiving an individual DSC call from a coast or ship station, according to the message, perform the following procedures as appropriate. Procedure The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T )

If no procedure exists, starts operating the received message automatically.

Basically similar to the routine individual call except normally using the distress and safety frequencies prior to other frequencies. TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | S A F W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 3 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x 2 1 8 2 . 0 k H z P r e s s C A N C E L t o s i l e n c e a l a r m . 44..55..22..11 Receiving special safety individual calls

(1) Safety test calls Procedure The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.

If received while the 7.5.1.1 Test call of the Automatic ACK menu is set to ON and there is no active procedure, this call can be acknowledged automatically.

To acknowledge manually, after silencing the alarm with CANCEL key, select ACK to start sending procedure.

(2) Safety position request calls Procedure The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.

If received while the 7.5.1.2 Position RQ call of the Automatic ACK menu is set to ON and there is no active procedure, this call can be acknowledged automatically.

To acknowledge manually, after silencing the alarm with CANCEL key, select ACK to start sending procedure.

When sending a reply as unable to comply, select NCK to send the acknowledge with no position data. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2187.5 2187.5 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | S A F T e s t W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z

[ A C K ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2187.5 2187.5 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | I N D | S A F P O S W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z

[ A C K ] [ N C K ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

4-43 Operation 4.5.3 Safety or urgency area calls For radiotelephone or FEC broadcasting, a DSC safety area call can be made as follows. Procedure 111 ... On the menu 1.DSC non-distress call, set the Call type to SAF/Area/TEL or URG/Area/TEL

(instead of TEL, FEC also available). 1)DSC non-distress call The menu becomes as shown at right and the cursor moves to the Area form. 222 ... Set the area to call. Input as below according to the Area form settings.

- When Center&rad Enter the center point of the area in Center. Enter the radius of the area in Radius.

- When Corner&dev (shown at right) Enter the northwest corner of the area in Corner. Enter the south and north/east and west deviation in a range from 00 to 99 in Deviation. 333 ... Select the Working FRQ/ Calling FRQ if needed, then press ENT to start the area call. 444 ... After finishing the transmission, start the communication with the handset in TEL mode. Call type :[SAF/Area/TEL ]

Area form :[Center&rad]

- Center :[89N179E]

- Radius :[0500NM]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[SAF/Area/TEL ]

Area form :[Corner&dev]

- Corner :[ N E]

- Deviation:[ / ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) DSC 2187.5 2187.5 A A T x T O : A r e a | S A F W a i t i n g f o r C H f r e e C a l l - F : R x 2 1 8 7 . 5 / T x 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z T E L : R x - - - - - . - / T x 2 1 8 2 . 0 k H z

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note

-

Incase of the urgency call, to inform receivers of the particular topic, additional settings such as Medical TRNSP (medical transport ship) or Neutral ship (neutral nationality) in the Subject field as shown at right are available. However to use this function, it is needed to set the menu 7.5.4 Medical use or 7.5.5 Neutral use to ON once after powering on the equipment. 1)DSC non-distress call Call type :[URG/Area/TEL ]

Area form :[Center&rad]

- Center :[89N179E]

- Radius :[0500NM]

Subject :[No information]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

- After finishing the area call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then start the telex communication with the data terminal. 4-44 Operation Receiving safety or urgency area calls 4.5.4 Procedure The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually. If no procedure exists, starts operating the received message, i.e. the specified working frequency is set automatically. Then press CANCEL to silence alarm and listen to the broadcasting. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A A R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | A r e a | S A F R e a d y f o r l i s t e n i n g ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) R X F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x - - - - - . - k H z

[ I N F ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note

- When receiving the area call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then receive the telex broadcasting with the data terminal.

-

To check the topic when receiving an urgency area call, select INF menu to view the detail of the message. 4-45 Operation 4.5.5 Distress alerts When in distress, distress alerts are always transmitted by pressing the dedicated DISTRESS key. The distress alerts transmit your own MMSI, ships position, time of the position, and the nature of distress. CAUTION Do not test the distress alert. Doing so may inconvenience local shipping and rescue centers. When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or officer in charge. If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu and transmit the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the controller. And then report the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue Coordination Center/ in Japan, inform the nearest Japan Coast Guard.) Information to be reported:

Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and reason why the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name and manufacture number/date, if possible. 44..55..55..11 Quick distress alerts The following describes the procedure to send a distress alert immediately without using menus. In this case, the nature of distress in the message will be sent as "Undesignated" by default. Further, if no information for the position and the time of position obtained within 23.5 hours, this information will be composed automatically. Procedure 111 ... Open the DISTRESS key cover. 222 ... Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4 seconds until the countdown is completed. 4-46 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 i n s e c4 D i s t r e s s c a l l s t a r t s kHz RX TX S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

Operation I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) D S C R x : 2 1 8 7 . 5 / T x : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z D i s t r e s s c a l l i n g N e x t : - - -

S t a g e : W a i t i n g f o r C H f r e e C a l l - F : / / / / /

N a t u r e : U n d e s i g n a t e d P o s U T C : 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N

: 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e

[ C a n c e l ]

S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) T E L R x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 / T x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 k H z R x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 / T x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 k H z D i s t r e s s c a l l i n g N e x t : R e s e n d s 4 . 1 m i n l a t e r S t a g e : W a i t i n g f o r A C K C a l l - F : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 N a t u r e : U n d e s i g n a t e d P o s U T C : 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N

: 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e

[ F R Q ] [ P a u s e ] [ P O S ] [ C H N G ] [ C a n c e l ]

S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z 333 ... After the antenna is tuned, the distress alert is sent. The distress alerts are sent on all 6 distress and safety frequencies. 444 ... The equipment stays in distress mode until acknowledgement is received or the distress alert cancelling procedure is complete.

Unless an acknowledgement is received or the distress alert is cancelled manually, the distress alert repeats automatically in a variable interval every 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.

(The time until next sending is shown at Next.)

The distress alert can be sent manually while waiting for acknowledgement by the DISTRESS key operation mentioned above.

While waiting for the acknowledgement, the radiotelephone communication is available. Additionally, when focusing the frequencies as shown at right, the distress and safety frequency can be changed with the jog dial.

Pressing CANCEL key or ENT moves the focused screen and makes following options available. FRQ ......... Moves the cursor to the frequency section Pause ...... Makes the distress mode pause. POS ......... Opens the position input menu CHNG ...... Changes the distress alert type (Multi/Single mode and the frequencies) Cancel ..... Starts the distress alert cancelling procedure, which is needed to send the DSC acknowledgement and to broadcast in the radiotelephone mode from the own ship. Furthermore, if the POS/CHNG is edited, MEM icon is displayed to indicate that there are some data stored temporarily until resending the distress alert. 555 ... When the acknowledgement is received, the message is displayed as shown at the right.

The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving alarm gradually grows louder.

The radiotelephone mode is set to the distress/safety frequency of the band on which the acknowledgement is received and antenna tuning is done immediately.

Press the CANCEL key or ENT to silence the alarm, then call for help with the handset. Normally, the responding station calls on the radiotelephone. Then reply to the receipt as follows. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A D S T A L T R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | O W N D - A C K | 2 M H z D I S T a c k n o w l e d g e d ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) T x : 2|4|6|8|12|16/ U n d e s i g n a t e d / T E L 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 P r e s s C A N C E L t o s i l e n c e a l a r m .

Say, "MAYDAY".

Say, "This is".

Own ship's MMSI and call sign, position, nature of distress, and rescue requests 4-47 Operation Note If cancelling the distress alert since a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, perform the distress alert cancelling procedure as follows. 1. Press the CANCEL key while the option selectable screen is focused. 2. On the popup screen, select jog dial, the Continue with and press ENT. Starts the distress alert cancelling procedure and sends the DSC acknowledgements to own ship in every frequency where distress alerts are transmitted. 3. After DSC acknowledgements are complete, the popup screen is displayed as shown at right. If the false distress alert indicates the FEC mode, the popup screen is displayed as shown at lower right. In this case, the message for cancelling distress alert is sent in the TLX mode automatically without operating the DTE. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) T E L R x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 / T x : 8 2 9 1 . 0 k H z D i s t r e s s c a l l i n g N e x t : R e s e n d s 3 . 8 m i n l a t e r S t a g e : W a i t i n g f o r A C K

! ! W a r n i n g ! !

C a l l - F : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 N a t u r e : U n d e s i g n a t e d P o s U T C : 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N

: 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e C a n c e l t h e t r a n s m i t t e d f a l s e d i s t r e s s a l e r t ?

( T G T : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 M )

[ C o n t i n u e ] [ R e t u r n ]

[ R e t u r n ]

[ F R Q ] [ P a u s e ] [ P O S ] [ C H N G ] [ C a n c e l ]

[ C a n c e l ]

S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) D S C R x : 2 1 8 7 . 5 / T x : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z D i s t r e s s c a n c e l c a l l i n g S t a g e : W a i t i n g f o r C H f r e e C a l l - F : / / / / /

N a t u r e : U n d e s i g n a t e d P o s U T C : 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N

: 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) T E L R x : 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x : 2 1 8 2 . 0 k H z C a n c e l l i n g t h e d i s t r e s s a l e r t V o i c e c a n c e l l a t i o n p r o c e d u r e :

A l l s t a t i o n s . ( t h r e e t i m e s ) T h i s i s [ N A M E ] [ C A L L S I G N ]

D S C c a n c e l l i n g c a l l s

[ M M S I ] [ P O S & U T C ] . a r e c o m p l e t e d . N e x t , C a n c e l m y d i s t r e s s a l e r t o f s t a r t t h e v o i c e c a n c e l

[ D A T E ] [ U T C ] . o n t h e r e q u i r e d b a n d s O v e r . a c c o r d i n g t o t h e T a r g e t : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 M H z m e s s a g e o n t h e s c r e e n .

* T o c h a n g e t h e b a n d , p r e s s E N T . S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z

[ O K ]

[ O K ]

4. According to the guidance on the screen, broadcast to cancel the distress alert in TEL mode.

When finishing the broadcast on a frequency, press ENT to change to the next frequency.

The cancelled frequency shows mark. 5. When the cancelling procedure is completed on every frequency, displays the operating screen as shown at right and finishes the distress mode. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) T E L R x : 4 1 2 5 . 0 / T x : 4 1 2 5 . 0 k H z C a n c e l l i n g t h e d i s t r e s s a l e r t V o i c e c a n c e l l a t i o n p r o c e d u r e :

A l l s t a t i o n s . ( t h r e e t i m e s ) T h i s i s [ N A M E ] [ C A L L S I G N ]

[ M M S I ] [ P O S & U T C ] . C a n c e l m y d i s t r e s s a l e r t o f

[ D A T E ] [ U T C ] . O v e r . T a r g e t : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 M H z

* T o c h a n g e t h e b a n d , p r e s s E N T . S I G W K R 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z 4 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A A T x T O : A l l | D S T | A C K C a n c e l l e d D I S T R E S S ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) C a l l - F : 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6

[ R T R Y ] [ I N F ] [ F R Q ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

4-48 Operation 44..55..55..22 Distress alerts from the menu Attention During communicating in telex mode, finish it to enable the menu before practicing below. The following describes the procedure to send a distress alert with the nature of distress selected in the menu. Also, besides manually inputting position and the time information, the subsequent communication mode, the transmission method and frequency can be set here. Note: Multi-frequency or single frequency can be selected as the transmission method. The various methods are shown below. Multi-frequency method: The distress alert message is sent continuously on each frequency, 2187.5 kHz, 8414.5 kHz, and at least one other distress/safety frequency. Single frequency method: The same distress alert message is sent on one distress/safety frequency 5 times continuously. If 2 or more distress/safety frequencies are selected, the same message is transmitted 5 times continuously in the same way on the other frequency after an interval between 3.5 to 4.5 minutes (variable). Procedure 111 ... On the status display or operation display, while pressing and holding MENU key, press 3 NR key to open 3. Editing a distress msg. The distress type is displayed as Undesignated as a default value. If the position information is input automatically by a GPS type device, or has already input manually, that information is also displayed. 222 ... Press ENT and select the nature of distress. The nature of distress is selectable from below. Nature of distress Fire Flooding Collision Grounding Listing Sinking Disabled Undesignated Abandoning Piracy attack Man overboard Contents in danger of Fire, explosion Flooding Collision Grounding Listing, capsizing Sinking Disabled and adrift Undesignated distress Abandoning ship Piracy/armed attack Man overboard robbery 3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

4-49 3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 8959.0123'N]

:[17959.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]

Tx bands :[2/ /6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

Operation 333 ... Press ENT. The cursor moves to Position. If a valid position and time of that position are already displayed, no entry is necessary. Skip to step 6. 444 ... Press ENT and select the quadrant of the position with the jog dial. The quadrant changes from NE NW SE

SW CL. Select CL to delete the input information. 555 ... After pressing ENT, input the latitude, longitude, and time using the numeric keypad. 666 ... Press ENT and select the Mode to change the subsequent communication mode after the DSC call. Either of Radiotelephone or FEC is selectable for the subsequent communicate mode. 777 ... Move the cursor to Attempt type and press ENT to change the transmission method for the distress alert. Multi-frequency method is set as the default. To change to the single frequency method, select Single-FRQ with the job dial and press ENT. 888 ... Move the cursor to Tx bands and press ENT to change the transmission frequency for the distress alert.

At first, all the frequencies are selected as transmission frequencies.

To change the frequencies, move the cursor by pressing ENT to the frequencies

(band) to be unselected, turn the jog dial so they are blank and press ENT.

For the Multi-frequency method, 2 and 8 are fixed and are skipped. Also in this case, it is necessary to select more than one other band.

After completing the Tx bands settings, the cursor returns to Nature. 4-50 Note If pressing DISTRESS key during the Tx bands settings (before fixing by pressing ENT), the distress alerts are sent on the band(s) registered previously. Operation 999 ... Open the DISTRESS key cover. 111 000 ... Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4 seconds until the countdown is completed. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) D S C R x : 2 1 7 7 . 0 / T x : 2 1 7 7 . 0 k H z 3 ) E d i t i n g a d i s t r e s s m s g D i s t r e s s c a l l s t a r t s N a t u r e : [ U n d e s i g n a t e d ]

P o s i t i o n : [ N E ]

[ 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N ]

[ 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E ]

U T C o f p o s : [ 2 3 : 5 9 ]

i n s e c M o d e : [ R a d i o t e l e p h o n e ]

A t t e m p t t y p e : [ M u l t i - F R Q ]

T x b a n d s : [ 2 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 ]

[ P r e v i e w ] [ T i p s ] [ C a n c e l ]

T x b a n d s 4 Note

- The rest of the procedure is the same as described in the "Quick distress alerts".

- Select Preview and press ENT before calling to display the details of the message as shown below. 3)Editing a distress msg Format :Distress Self-ID :431001234 Nature :Fire Position : 8959.0123'N

:17959.6789'E UTC of pos :23:59 Comm type :Radiotelephone EOS :EOS

[Return] [Tips] [Cancel]

- Select Tips and press ENT to display precautions about operations in this screen in a popup screen as shown below. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) T E L R x : 4 0 1 5 . 0 / T x : 4 0 1 5 . 0 k H z 3 ) E d i t i n g a d i s t r e s s m s g

- P r e s s D I S T R E S S k e y t o s e n d t h e e d i t e d m s g .

- T o s a v e D I S T m s g : S a v e

- T o u s e s a v e d m s g : S e t N B ) D E F A U L T N O T C H A N G E D .

[ C l o s e ]

[ S a v e ] [ S e t ] [ C l o s e ]

N a t u r e : [ F i r e ]

P o s i t i o n : [ N W ]

[ 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N ]

[ 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' W ]

U T C o f p o s : [ 2 3 : 5 9 ]

M o d e ( f i x e d ) : [ R a d i o t e l e p h o n e ]

A t t e m p t t y p e : [ S i n g l e - F R Q ]

T x b a n d s : [ 2 / / 6 / 8 / 1 2 / 1 6 ]

[ P r e v i e w ] [ T i p s ] [ C a n c e l ]

[ T i p s ]

This popup screen shows the following messages and the handling menus;

When sending the edited message, use DISTRESS key on the menu screen. To save the edited message (except Pos/UTC), select Save and press ENT. To load the saved message (except Pos/UTC), select Set and press ENT. The default values of 3. Editing a distress msg are not changed. 4-51 Operation 44..55..55..33 Receiving distress alerts When a distress alert is received from another ship, displays the event immediately with the specific two-tone alarm sound. WARNING If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or officer in charge. Doing so may save the lives of the crews and passengers on the ship in distress. Procedure 111 ... When a distress alert is received, the distress message is displayed.

The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving alarm gradually grows louder. However, the aural alarm keeps silence if the distress position is not within 500nm, and is not in the polar areas (greater than 70N/S).

If no procedure exists, starts operating the received message automatically. 222 ... Press the CANCEL key or ENT to stop the alarm. Then the screen at right is displayed.

Keep watch for at least 5 minutes. Notify the coast station as appropriate.

If received the same distress alert on another frequency again, the right lower screen is displayed. Then pressing ENT on Accept or leaving 10 seconds changes the frequency to 8291.0 kHz for the radiotelephone mode or 8376.5 kHz for the telex mode.

Press FUNC key or ENT* to move the focused screen to the operation control screen and select the following options to handle the procedure.

* If the A mark is not displayed, press ENT to activate this procedure. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A D S T A L T R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | D I S T R E S S A L T W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 2 m i n ) S i n g l e - F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x 2 1 8 2 . 0 K H z P r e s s C A N C E L t o s i l e n c e a l a r m . I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A D S T A L T R x I D : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | D I S T R E S S A L T W a i t i n g t o s e n d A C K ( 0 0 . 3 m i n ) S i n g l e - F R Q : 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x 2 1 8 2 . 0 k H z

[ A C K ] [ R L Y ] [ I N F ] [ F R Q ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

ACK ....... Sends the acknowledgement to the distress alert. RLY ....... Sends the distress relay. INF ........ Indicates the received distress message. FRQ....... Changes the watchkeeping frequency. HLD ....... Makes the procedure on hold. END....... Terminates the procedure. Note 4-52

- The distress acknowledgement is normally sent from a coast station. However after consulting with the RCC or a coast station and being directed, it is possible to acknowledge the ship in distress from your own ship. If the distress alert is not received at 2187.5 kHz, the acknowledgement is inhibited and cannot be sent. Incase of the radiotelephone specified, after sending the acknowledgement the frequency is set to 2182.0 kHz. Then start the radiotelephone communication

-

-

with the ship in distress according to the following procedure.

Say "MAYDAY".

Repeat the identity (MMSI) of the ship in distress 3 times

Say "This is..."

Repeat the identity (MMSI) of your ship 3 times

Say "RECEIVED MAYDAY". Operation

-

Incase of the FEC specified, after sending the acknowledgement the frequency is set to 2174.5 kHz. Then start the telex communication with the data terminal.

- The distress relay calls may be received without receiving the distress alert. In this case, keep watch the distress frequency and handle the message using the displayed options as appropriate. 4.5.6 Distress relay calls on behalf of someone else (DROBOSE) If another ship is in distress but is itself unable to make a distress alert, and the master of the ship considers that further help is necessary, the distress relay call on behalf of the ship can be transmitted using the "DSC drobose call" menu. In this case, compose a distress relay call format by inputting the MMSI (if known), the ship's position and the time of position (if known), and the nature of distress to send to a specific area or a coast station. CAUTION When sending a drobose call, do NOT press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may cause a false distress alert.

(Drobose calls can be sent via the [Call] button displayed on the screen.) Procedure 111 ... On the status display or operation display, while pressing and holding MENU key, press 2SCAN key to open 2. DSC drobose call. 222 ... Select Address and press ENT, input the MMSI of the calling coast station. 2)DSC drobose call Format :[Individual]

Address :[ ]

Distress ID:[ ]

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[ ]

:[ . ' ]

:[ . ' ]

UTC of pos :[ : ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

2)DSC drobose call Format :[Individual]

Address :[0 ]

Distress ID:[ ]

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[ ]

:[ . ' ]

:[ . ' ]

UTC of pos :[ : ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

4-53 Operation 333 ... Input the Distress ID (MMSI) of the ship in distress, Nature, Position and/or UTC, if known. The nature of distress is selectable from below. Nature of distress Fire Flooding Collision Grounding Listing Sinking Disabled Undesignated Abandoning Piracy attack Man overboard Contents in danger of Fire, explosion Flooding Collision Grounding Listing, capsizing Sinking Disabled and adrift Undesignated distress Abandoning ship Piracy/armed attack Man overboard robbery 444 ... If required, change the communication mode and/or the calling frequency to send the drobose call. Mode:

Calling FRQ: Distress and safety frequency Radiotelephone or FEC

(2/4/6/8/12/16 MHz) 555 ... Select Call and press ENT to make a drobose call. After sending the drobose call, TEL mode is set while waiting for the acknowledgement as shown at right. In this case, the watchkeeping receiver stops scanning frequencies to watch only the calling frequency as shown at right. 666 ... When receiving the acknowledgement from the coast station, the screen shows as shown at right.

The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving alarm gradually grows louder.

Press the CANCEL key or ENT to silence the alarm, then start the distress traffic. 2)DSC drobose call Format :[Individual]

Address :[001234567]

Distress ID:[0 ]

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[ ]

:[ . ' ]

:[ . ' ]

UTC of pos :[ : ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

2)DSC drobose call Distress ID:[123456789]

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 8959.0000'N]

:[17959.0000'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode :[Radiotelephone]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL 2182.0 2182.0 A D S T R L Y T x T O : 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | I N D | D S T R L Y W a i t i n g f o r A C K ( 0 0 . 5 m i n ) C a l l - F : R x 2 1 8 7 . 5 / T x 2 1 8 7 . 5 k H z T E L : R x 2 1 8 2 . 0 / T x 2 1 8 2 . 0 k H z

[ R L Y ] [ I N F ] [ F R Q ] [ H L D ] [ E N D ]

Note Such messages can be sent using Area format. In this case, select Area (centre or corner) for the broadcast communication. 4-54 Operation 4.6 DSC call log DSC messages are classified as received distress messages, received other messages and transmitted messages. The 20 most recent messages for every type are saved in the log. CAUTION Received distress message logs are automatically deleted after 48 hours to avoid accidental resending or other misoperation. Accordingly, if such messages cannot be read, it is not a malfunction. The received distress message logs are cleared when turning off the power by such as the breaker on the power supply. Due to the SOLAS Convention

(keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times), do not turn off the equipment when at sea. 4.6.1 Received distress messages The distress alerts, the distress acknowledgements, the distress relay calls, and the distress relay acknowledgements are stored in this log. For the distress alerts, the messages with the same content are received at a maximum of 6 messages for the multi-frequency method or a maximum of 5 messages for the single frequency method, but only one is stored unless otherwise closed the received message during that multiple receptions. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 4.1 Received distress.

On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship is displayed highlighted by the cursor.

If the message includes a reception error

(ECC error) ERR is shown in the CAT field. 222 ... Select a displayed message and press ENT. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) T E L R x : 4 1 2 5 . 0 / T x : 4 1 2 5 . 0 k H z 4 . 1 ) R e c e i v e d d i s t r e s s N o D a t e / T i m e C A T F o r m a t 0 1 2 0 0 8 - 0 7 - 3 1 1 1 : 2 0 D S T A L L 0 1 2 0 0 8 - 0 8 - 0 1 2 3 : 3 1 D S T I N D I V 0 2 2 0 0 8 - 0 7 - 3 1 1 0 : 3 3 D S T I N D I V 0 3 2 0 0 8 - 0 7 - 3 1 1 0 : 2 5 D S T A R E A 0 4 2 0 0 8 - 0 7 - 3 1 1 0 : 0 3 - - - D S T R S 0 5 2 0 0 8 - 0 7 - 1 9 2 2 : 5 3 E R R D S T R S F r o m : 4 3 1 0 0 0 1 2 3 I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) T E L R x : 2 0 6 5 . 0 / T x : 2 0 6 5 . 0 k H z R e c e i v e d d i s t r e s s m e s s a g e T y p e : D i s t r e s s F r o m : 0 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N a t u r e : M a n o v e r b o a r d P o s i t i o n : 1 2 3 4 . 0 0 0 0 ' N 1 2 3 4 5 . 0 0 0 0 ' E U T C o f p o s : 1 1 : 2 0 M o d e : R a d i o t e l e p h o n e E O S : E O S

[ C l o s e ]

[ C l o s e ]

4-55 Operation 4.6.2 Received other messages Received messages other than the distress (routine, safety, and urgency) are stored in this log. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 4.2 Received others.

On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship is displayed highlighted by the cursor.

If the message includes a reception error

(ECC error) ERR is shown in the CAT field. 222 ... Select a displayed message and press ENT. The selected message is displayed. 4.6.3 Transmitted messages Every transmitted message is stored in this log. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 4.3 Transmitted calls. On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship is displayed highlighted by the cursor. 222 ... Select a displayed message and press ENT. The selected message is displayed. 4-56 Operation 4.7 Display of telex communication logs The telex communication is saved automatically as the log, and the reference is available later. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used. 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Service Call logging history with Enter key. The list of the log as shown at right is displayed. 333 ... Move the cursor to the objective file referring to the timestamp and press Enter key to view it.

The file content on the viewer scrolls by the key.

To close the file viewer, press the ESC key. Note The maximum size of a log file is 8192 bytes. When exceeding it, the excess data are stored in another file. 4-57 Operation 4.8 USB memory operation This section describes how to use the USB memory. Attention The following conditions are required for the USB memory. Note) Not all USB memories satisfying the every condition are guaranteed.

- The specification is complied with USB 1.1 or USB 2.0 standards.

- No USB hub is built-in and is used to connect the USB memory.

- No security function such as encryption or password to access is included.

- No write-protect function is included, or that function is set to Writable.

- Already formatted with FAT16 or FAT32 by Windows OS. Only the USB memory is connectable to the USB memory connector. When the USB memory size is large, the file access time will be longer than small one. The files or folders named with multibyte character prepared by other than the data terminal cannot be accessed. If the USB memory is removed, always close the connector with the rubber cap to ensure the water-proof and dust-proof performance. Initializing the USB memory will erase all data on the USB memory. To avoid abnormal conditions, do not use the USB memory that has the broken file system. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used.

[ T E L ] T x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z / R x = 2 1 7 4 . 5 k H z U S B F i l e T u n e C o n n e c t S e r v i c e S y s t e m H e l p S T A T U S I N F O S c a n n i n g i n f o T u n e r / T x . P O W E R

[ N o s c a n n i n g ] T U N E R : [ R E A D Y ]

T x . P O W E R : [ H I G H ]

L a s t s t a t u s m e s s a g e P r e s s E n t e r k e y t o g e t t h e a c c e s s r i g h t i n t h e N B D P m o d e . 222 ... After checking the USB mark indicating on the top of the display of the data terminal, select File from the main menu and the objective dropdown menu.

To start either one of Edit existing file, Rename file, Delete file, or Copy file, input A: as the USB drive.

To initialize the USB memory, select Initialize USB and operate in accordance with the message on the dialog box.

To unmount the USB memory, select Remove USB and operate in accordance with the message on the dialog box. After completing the unmount and the USB mark of the top of the display is erased, the USB memory can be safely removed from the data terminal. 4-58 Operation 4.9 Popup screens The contents of the popup screens of the data terminal are as follows (in alphabetical order). Message Buttons Description Attention Are you sure to erase?

Yes/ No Is it OK to delete a file?

Yes:

No:

Deletes the file. Cancels this operation. Attention Are you sure accessible setup data?

to initialize all of these Yes/ No Attention Do you really want to change column width?

Yes/ No Attention Formatting will erase all data on the USB memory. To format the USB memory, choose Yes. Attention Keyboard input unavailable now. The connected controller is in operation. Yes/ No

-----

Is it OK to initialize the all items where the cursor can be located. Initializes them. Yes:

No:

Cancels this operation. Is it OK to change the column width of a line?

Yes:

No:

All the data of USB memory is deleted by the format operation. Yes:

No:

Formats the USB memory. Cancel the format. Changes the column width. Cancels this operation. The controller is in operation such as menu and the data terminal cannot be operated now. Attention The antenna controller. Wait a moment, please. tuning is started by the

-----

Now tuning the antenna with the controller, and unavailable for a while. Attention The current database will be lost. Are you sure to continue?

Attention The DTE cancels the print request for the DTE printing buffer overflow. Attention The file size exceeds the maximum value, so the DTE deletes excess data. Are you sure?

Yes/ No OK Yes/ No Overwrites the current file. Cancels this operation. Is it OK to overwrite the current database file to save the new one?

Yes:

No:

The print request from the controller or by the data terminal operation has been refused for the printing buffer overflow. When saving a file, detected the file size is exceeding the 8kB. The data terminal can delete the excess data and continue to save the file. Yes:

No:

Continues the process. Cancels this operation. Attention The maximum field size is reached. OK The editing message file size is now beyond 8kB. Please downsize it. Attention The same file name already exists. Do you overwrite it?

Yes/ No The same file name exists. Is it 0K to overwrite it?

Yes:

No:

Overwrites the current file. Cancels this operation. Block has not marked. This function is impossible now. OK No block is selected and refused the request. Select a block in advance. Confirmation Is the frequency free now?

Continue Search?

Yes/ No Yes/ No Check the frequency is busy or not. Yes:

No:

Continues the process. Returns to the menu Continue searching the string specified?

Yes:

No:

Continues searching. Cancels this operation. 4-59 Operation Message Buttons Description Error File access failed. Error Invalid file. OK The specified file cannot be used for any malfunction. OK The file is malformed and invalid. Error Keyboard I/F ROM checksum error. OK Detected the keyboard I/F ROM checksum error. Error No folder exists. Error No response. Error Overcurrent has been detected at the USB port. Error Register the 9-digit Self-ID in advance. Error Register this station's ID in advance. Error The antenna is not tuned correctly. Tune to the frequency now?

OK A specified folder is not found. OK OK OK OK The controller may be busy and returns no reply to the data terminal. The attached USB device may be failure. Own station ID (9digit selcal number) is needed to call the station by the 9 digit selcal number. Own station ID is needed to call the station in the telex mode. Yes/ No The antenna is not tuned. Starts the antenna tuning immediately?

Yes:

Tunes immediately. Tuning is not needed. No:

Error The attached USB device is not supported. The DTE supports the USB memory only. Error The DTE failed to access to the file system. OK OK The data terminal detects the USB device except the USB memory. The file system and the files are inaccessible now. Error The DTE failed to print. OK Printing is unavailable now. Error The DTE failed to stop the USB drive. OK The USB drive cannot be unmounted. Error The DTE was unable format. Please remove the USB memory. to complete the Error The file is too large. 4-60 OK OK The data terminal failed to format the USB memory, so remove the USB memory. The specified file cannot be opened because of the file size beyond the 8kB. Message Buttons Description Operation Error The file name extension is allowed only DB. Error The file name extension is allowed only TLX. Error The file name is wrong. Error The file saving failed. There is not enough room on the DTE drive. Error The keyboard is disconnected. Error The keyboard is not ready. Error The memory is already full. So you cannot make a new file. Error The printer is not ready. Check the paper and online status. Error The same file name already exists. Error The station ID is not present. Error There is a possibility of the USB IC failure. All USB functions are disabled. Error There is not enough room on the DTE main drive. Delete some the folder. files, or change Error There is not enough room on the USB drive. Delete some files, or change the folder. Error Two or more channels are needed. Error Tx/Rx frequency is not present. OK Input DB as the correct extension. OK Input TLX as the correct extension. OK OK

-----

-----

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK The specified file is not found, or the file name to be copied is wrong. No file can be saved because the data terminal has no sufficient vacant memory. The keyboard is disconnected and no control for the data terminal is available now. Malfunction is detected at the keyboard I/F and the keyboard is no longer available now. The number of files exceeded maximum value (100), so a new file cannot be made. The printer cannot be used. Confirm that paper is put on or that it is online. This file name already exists, and is no longer available now. SELCAL number (ID) is not registered in the specified radio station. Detected the USB IC failure. And now out of work here. The data terminal has no sufficient vacant memory. Delete files or change the folder adequately. The USB memory has no sufficient vacant area. Delete files or change the folder adequately. Register two or more channels to start scanning of the specified station.. The frequency is not registered in the specified radio station. 4-61 Operation Message Buttons Description Formatting the USB memory. Please wait. Now printing. Please wait. Now reading data. Please wait. Now processing NBDP settings. Please wait. Now saving data. Please wait.

-----

-----

-----

-----

USB memory is being formatted. Wait for a while. It is printing. Wait for a while. Information on the file and the folder is being read. Wait for a while. The NBDP setting information is now being read or saved. Wait for a while.

-----

It is saving a file. Wait for a while. Really quit without saving?

Yes/ No Replace the string?

Yes/ No Is it OK to quit without saving?

Yes:

No:

Quits immediately Returns to the editor. Continue to replace the strings specified?

Yes:

No:

Replacing. Cancels this operation. String not found. OK The data terminal cannot find the string searching. The USB drive is installed and ready to use. OK Recognized the USB memory. The USB memory can now be safely removed from the DTE. The USB memory format complete. There are no data to be restored. OK OK OK Unmounting the USB drive was completed. The format of USB memory was completed. There are no data to be restored and Undo is invalid. To stop the USB drive, choose Yes. After the USB drive is stopped, the USB drive can be safely removed. Yes/ No Select Yes when you unmount the USB drive. After unmounting, USB memory can be removed. Waiting for the tuner answer Warning The USB memory was removed without unmounting that drive.

-----

OK Now waiting for the answer from the antenna tuner. Just a moment, please. Removing the USB memory without unmounting may cause the malfunction of the USB memory. 4-62 Settings & Registrations 5. SETTINGS & REGISTRATIONS This chapter describes the procedures for settings and registrations such as manual date and time settings, registration of channels in each mode, advanced DSC settings, printer settings, and other settings for the equipment. 5.1 Date and time settings Normally, the date and time are updated automatically if importing GPS information. But, if necessary, input these parameters manually as follows. CAUTION The time in the 7.1 Date & time menu means the present time, and is different from the time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu that means the time when the position information is valid. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.1 Date &

time. 222 ... To input the date, press ENT. Input the year, month, and date with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT. 333 ... After completing the above steps, the cursor moves to 2. Present time. 7.1)Date & time 1.Date :2011-12-30 2.Present time :23:59 3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back 7.1)Date & time 1.Date :2012-12-30 2.Present time :23:59 3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back 7.1)Date & time 1.Date :2012-12-31 2.Present time :23:59 3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back 5-1 Settings & Registrations 444 ... To input the present time, press ENT.

Input the hours and minutes with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.

To close this menu after completing the date and time settings, place the cursor on any one of the selectable items and press the CANCEL key. 7.1)Date & time 1.Date :2012-12-31 2.Present time :23:59 3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back Note In addition to the above, the following items can be set in this menu.

- UTC/LT:

Select a type of time, Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) or Local Time (LT), shown on the screen.

- LT diff:

Set the local time difference to display the local time. 5-2 5.2 Own ship position and time settings Normally, the ship's position and the time are updated automatically if importing GPS information. But, if necessary, input these parameters manually as follows. Settings & Registrations CAUTION The time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu means the time when the position information is valid, and is different from the present time mentioned in the 7.1 Date & time menu. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.2 POS/TIME. 222 ... To input your own ship's position, press ENT. Select the position quadrant with the jog dial, and press ENT. Then input the latitude and longitude with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT. 333 ... When completing the input of the ships position, the cursor moves to the time column of the 2. UTC of position.

Input the hours and minutes with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.

Just after inputting the position, the present time is input to this column automatically.

To close this menu after completing the setting, press the CANCEL key. 7.2)POS/TIME 1.Own position:NE 8959.1234'N 17959.1234'E 2.UTC of position:

23:59 0.Back 7.2)POS/TIME 1.Own position:NE 8959.1234'N 17959.1234'E 2.UTC of position:

23:59 0.Back 7.2)POS/TIME 1.Own position:NE 8959.1234'N 17959.1234'E 2.UTC of position:

23:59 0.Back Note

- After the position and the time information are input manually, that information

-

-

is not overwritten with an external device, such as a GPS, automatically. If using the GPS information after manually inputting data, set the quadrant field mentioned above to GPS. If the position and the time information are not received, from a GPS or other device within 10 minutes after powering on, or after 10 minutes has elapsed since the external input was interrupted, the alarm screen may appear. Further, regardless of either manual or automatic input, if the position and the time are not updated within 4 hours since the last entry, the alarm screen also appears. 5-3 Settings & Registrations 5.3 Controller settings The following describes the procedure regarding individual settings for the controller such as LCD adjustment. 5.3.1 LCD adjustment The LCD conditions for viewability are adjustable as follows. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.3.1 LCD adjustment. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 222 ... Move the cursor to the desired item and press ENT. Then alter the settings as appropriate with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT again.

Set each item within the ranges given below:

Contrast:

Dimmer:

Screen saver:

Timer:

1 - 11 1 - 10 ON/OFF 1 - 999 seconds

To close this menu, place the cursor on any one of the selectable items and press the CANCEL key. 5.3.2 Sound settings 7.3.1)LCD adjustment 1.Contrast : 06 2.Dimmer Maximum : 10 Typical : 08 Minimum : 06 3.Screen saver : OFF Timer(sec): 060 0.Back 7.3.1)LCD adjustment 1.Contrast : 06 2.Dimmer Maximum : 10 Typical : 08 Minimum : 06 3.Screen saver : OFF Timer(sec): 060 0.Back Sound settings such as the click beep are adjustable as follows. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.3.2 Sound. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 222 ... Move the cursor to the desired item and press ENT. Then set the conditions as appropriate with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT again.

Notification level for a tone can be set within 1 - 7.

When Sidetone is set to ON, an 800 Hz tone sounds during keying in.

To close this menu, place the cursor on any one of the selectable items and press the CANCEL key. 5-4 7.3.2)Sound 1.Operation

- Speaker : ON

- Click : ON 2.Notification level: 7 3.Sidetone : ON 0.Back 7.3.2)Sound 1.Operation

- Speaker : ON

- Click : ON 2.Notification level: 7 3.Sidetone : ON 0.Back 5.3.3 User key assignments User key assignment enables the desired menu to be displayed immediately without moving through the hierarchical menus, and is assignable as follows. Settings & Registrations Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.3.3 User key assign. The screen at right is displayed. If the desired menu has already been registered, the cursor is placed on that menu. 222 ... Move the cursor to the desired menu to be registered with the jog dial. The assignable menus are as follows:

7.3.3)User key assign 1.DSC non-distress call 2.DSC drobose call 3.Editing a distress msg 4.DSC logs 5.Radio operation 6.User channel list 7.ITU channel list 8.Receiver 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. DSC non-distress call DSC drobose call Editing a distress msg DSC logs Radio operation User channel list ITU channel list Receiver Scan Transmitter Maintenance Self diagnosis DSC loop Alarm information Software version Setup Date & time

(Menu1)

(Menu2)

(Menu3)

(Menu4)

(Menu5)

(Menu5.1)

(Menu5.2)

(Menu5.4)

(Menu5.4.7)

(Menu5.5)

(Menu6)

(Menu6.1)

(Menu6.1.1)

(Menu6.2)

(Menu6.3)

(Menu7)

(Menu7.1) 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. POS/TIME My controller LCD adjustment Sound User channels DSC/WKR condition Automatic ACK WKR scanning FRQ Option CH dial lock ON/OFF 2182kHz AM mode DSC alarm setting Group ID Inactivity timeout DSC call list

(Menu7.2)

(Menu7.3)

(Menu7.3.1)

(Menu7.3.2)

(Menu7.4)

(Menu7.5)

(Menu7.5.1)

(Menu7.5.2)

(Menu7.6)

---

---

---

(Menu7.3.3)

(Menu7.5.6)

(Menu7.5.7)

(Menu7.5.8) 333 ... Press ENT to complete registration. After registration, the screen returns to the previous hierarchical menu as shown at right. 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back Note When the USER key is pressed in the factory default setting, 7.3 My controller menu is immediately displayed. 5-5 Settings & Registrations 5.3.4 Selecting Tx meters The meter displayed in the status display indicates the strength of the received signal (S meter). However, it can also indicate one of Tx power, antenna current, PA voltage, PA current or key information during transmission. 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :Ia 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :Ia 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My controller. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 222 ... Move the cursor to 4. Tx meter with the numeric keypad or jog dial. 333 ... Press ENT, and select the meter type with the jog dial. Ia ........ Antenna current The selectable meters are as follows:

PWR .... Tx power

Vc ....... PA voltage

Ic ........ PA current

Key.Key information*

* When keying during the ARQ communication, the Key is indicated regardless of this setting. 444 ... Press ENT to confirm the selection. The setting is complete. 5-6 5.3.5 Transferring user channel data to another controller When 2 controllers are connected, stored information (user channel table) can be transferred from the controller having access rights to another controller (monitor condition). Settings & Registrations Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My controller. 222 ... Move the cursor to 5. Data transfer with the numeric keypad or jog dial and press ENT. The popup screen as shown at right is displayed. 333 ... Press ENT to confirm the selection.

The popup screen as shown at right is displayed to indicate the controller's status for forwarding.

The screen at right (below) is displayed on the monitor. If OK is selected or the screen is left as it is for 10 seconds, transferring of stored information is started. 444 ... Forwarding of stored information is started.

During forwarding, the popup screen as shown at right is displayed.

The screen at right (below) is displayed on the monitor.

The previous screen is returned to when forwarding is completed. Note To cancel forwarding midway, press the CANCEL key or ENT. 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment OK to transfer the 2.Sound user channels to 3.User key assign another controller?

4.Tx meter : Ia

[ OK ] [Cancel]

5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back 7.3)My controller Wait a moment, please. 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter : Ia 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back OK to update this user channel table?

[ OK ] [Cancel]

[Display on monitor]

7.3)My controller Data sending...

[Cancel]

1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter : Ia 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back Updating the table...

[Cancel]

[Display on monitor]

5-7 Settings & Registrations 5.3.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for menu shutdown) To close menus of the controller automatically which is left as opening menus, the inactivity timer can be set according to the following procedure. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My controller. 222 ... Move the cursor to 6. Menu shutdown with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT. 333 ... Input the timer value and press ENT.

The range is from 00 to 60 minutes.

To set this timer to OFF, input 00. In this case, the screen shows OFF as shown at right. 5.3.7 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :OFF 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back Setting the reference value for the channel auto search When making a DSC routine call, the controller searches the working channel (frequency) automatically by checking the every channel busy referring the signal level with the value set as follows. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My controller. 222 ... Move the cursor to 7. CH search ref with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT. 333 ... Input the reference value and press ENT. The range is from 00 to 50. 5-8 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :10min 7.CH search ref :40 0.Back 7.3)My controller 1.LCD adjustment 2.Sound 3.User key assign 4.Tx meter :PWR 5.Data transfer 6.Menu shutdown :OFF 7.CH search ref :45 0.Back Settings & Registrations 5.4 Registering user channels Often used frequencies at the controller for the radiotelephone, CW, and DSC mode can be registered as user channels and used in scanning radio settings or groups. A total of 20 groups with 20 channels set to each group (i.e. 400 channels) can be registered. Furthermore, the user channels of the telex frequency can be registered to the station list of the data terminal. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.4 User channels (index). 222 ... Select the desired row or group to be edited with the numeric keypad or jog dial. The screen at right is displayed. (This example is for new registration to group 03.) Also, if an unregistered group is opened, TEL is displayed at Type as the default. 333 ... Press ENT to enter the group name.

Up to 18 characters can be registered.

The following characters are available:

Alphabet (capital and small letters)

Numbers 0 - 9

The following signs, space and determination symbol ()

[ ] _ " # % & ' ( ) ? @ + - / = : ; < >

Group names can be omitted. 444 ... Select a character and press ENT one by one.

When inputting numbers with the numeric keypad ENT is not needed.

To return to the previous letter, press the CANCEL key.

To complete name entry of 18 characters long, press ENT after selecting the last character by the jog dial. Or, if the name is less than 18 characters long, following the name, select the determination symbol (), as shown at right and press ENT. Type Pacific ABC 7.4)User channels (index) No CH group name 01 JRC Tokyo TEL 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 CW 7.4)User channels (table) Name:

Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz]

041 042 043 044 045 046 7.4)User channels (table) Name:

Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz]

041 042 043 044 045 046 7.4)User channels (table) Name: Japan Radio Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz]

041 042 043 044 045 046 Mode Mode Mode Note The character sequence shown by turning the jog dial is as follows:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z [ ] _ " # % & ' ( ) ? @ + - / = : ; < > 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (space) 5-9 Settings & Registrations 555 ... After completing the above steps, the cursor returns to Type.

If necessary, change the group attribute

(communication mode or custom).

The following attributes can be selected:

TEL Radiotelephone mode

DSC Digital selective calling mode

CW Continuous wave mode

Custom Communication mode mix 666 ... When setting of group attributes is completed, the cursor returns to the topmost row of the channel number.

(CHNo). 777 ... Select the channel number to register with the jog dial, and press ENT. Register as follows in the popup screen at right.

When the group attribute is Custom, specify the communication mode at Mode. Otherwise, the communication mode is fixed to the mode specified at Type.

To reference a frequency from the ITU channel, move the cursor to ITU channel, press ENT, and specify that channel number.

Move the cursor to Rx freq(kHz), press ENT, and enter the Rx frequency.

Move the cursor to Tx freq(kHz), press ENT, and enter the Tx frequency. 888 ... After completing the above steps, move the cursor to OK, and press ENT to complete registration.

Follow the same procedure above to create a group of channels.

Already registered channels can be changed by the above procedure.

To close this menu, place the cursor on any one of the registration numbers, and press the CANCEL key. 7.4)User channels (table) Name: Japan Radio Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz]

041 042 043 044 045 046 Tx[kHz]

7.4)User channels (table) Name: Japan Radio Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz]

041 042 043 044 045 046 Tx[kHz]

CHNo. 041/Type TEL Mode :TEL ITU Channel :

Rx freq(kHz) :

Tx freq(kHz) :

[OK] [Cancel] [Erase]

7.4)User channels (table) Name: Japan Radio Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz]

041 042 043 044 045 046 Tx[kHz]

Mode Mode Mode 7.4)User channels (table) Name: Japan Radio Type: TEL CHNo Rx[kHz]

041 4071.0 042 043 044 045 046 Tx[kHz]

4071.0 Mode TEL Note

-

-

-

To delete an already registered channel, move the cursor to Erase in the above popup screen, and press ENT. To erase an already registered group, move the cursor to "000 ALL CLEAR function" in the bottommost row of the channel list, and press ENT. Next, move the cursor to OK in the confirmation screen, and press ENT. To erase all already registered groups, move the cursor to "00 ALL CLEAR function" in the User channels (index) screen, and press ENT. Next, move the cursor to OK in the confirmation screen, and press ENT.

- When the 7.6.1 Connection is set to DTE, the group 20 becomes the reserved group for telex channels of the data terminal and inaccessible at the controller. 5-10 5.5 Advanced settings for DSC/WKR The following describes the procedure for the advanced DSC settings such as automatic acknowledgement, as well as setting the watch frequency of the watch keeping receiver. Settings & Registrations Menu screen Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.5 DSC/WKR condition. The following describes the procedures from this screen. Note that the screen at right shows factory default settings. 5.5.1 Automatic acknowledgement 7.5)DSC/WKR condition 1.Automatic ACK 2.WKR scanning FRQ 3.DSC alarm setting 4.Medical use :OFF 5.Neutral use :OFF 6.Group ID 7.Inactivity timeout 8.DSC call list While the automatic acknowledgement is set to ON, and no menu is displayed and there is no active procedure, if either one of the individual calls below is received, the acknowledgement is sent automatically.

Safety test call

Safety position request call

Routine polling call

Individual call requesting communication without valid frequency (*)

(*) In this case, the unable to comply acknowledgement is sent. Procedure 111 ... Move the cursor to 1. Automatic ACK, and press ENT. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 222 ... Set the call setting targeted for automatic acknowledgement to ON. 5.5.2 Setting DSC watch frequency 7.5.1)Automatic ACK 1.Test call :ON 2.Position RQ call :OFF 3.Polling call :ON 4.Individual call :ON 0.Back Set the frequency to watch on the WKR (DSC watch keeping receiver). Procedure 111 ... Move the cursor to 2. WKR scanning FRQ, and press ENT. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 222 ... Press ENT, and set another frequency in addition to 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz to ON. 7.5.2)WKR scanning FRQ 1.Registration

- CH1 2187.5kHz :(Const)

- CH2 4207.5kHz :OFF

- CH3 6312.0kHz :ON

- CH4 8414.5kHz :(Const)

- CH5 12577.0kHz :ON

- CH6 16804.5kHz :OFF 0.Back Note In accordance with the SOLAS Convention, 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz cannot be turned OFF. 5-11 Settings & Registrations 5.5.3 Setting receiving alarms The DSC receiving alarm can be set as follows. Procedure Move the cursor to 3. DSC alarm setting, and press ENT. The screen as shown at right is displayed. Change the settings as appropriate.

To disable the receiving alarms for routine and safety calls, set 1. Safety/Routine RX ALM to OFF. 7.5.3)DSC alarm setting 1.Safety/Routine RX ALM :ON 2.Distress RX ALM

- Maximum distance(NM):500

- Self-terminating :OFF 0.Back

The receiving alarms condition of distress alerts or distress relay calls can be changed using the menu 2. Distress RX ALM as follows.

- Normally when receiving a new distress event, the receiving alarm has to be stopped manually. However if the ship in distress is located within 70 degree north and 70 degree south latitude, and farther than the Maximum distance value while the Self-

terminating set is ON, the alarm is treated as the self-terminating alarm.

- The Maximum distance can be set within the range of 500 to 999 NM. Note1) Note2) If making this value valid, always set the Self-terminating to ON. If receiving DSC messages from the ships located out of range, the messages are handled normally except the alarm sound. 5.5.4 Using medical/neutral settings for urgency calls Set the condition so that an urgency area call containing the additional subject of either "Medical transportation" or "Neutral nationality" can be sent. It is useful for the situation when sailing dangerous waters such as in areas of political instability, and needed to inform receivers of the additional information if any of the following apply.

- Own ship is performing medical transportation and protected under the 1949 Geneva Convention.

- Own ship is of neutral nationality in accordance with ITU resolution 18 (Mob-83). Additionally note that this setting is returned to the default (OFF) if the power is turned off. Procedure To use these kinds of calls, set 4. Medical use or 5. Neutral use condition to ON. 5.5.5 Registering the ship's group ID Register the group ID (group ship ID number) for receiving group calls. Procedure 111 ... Move the cursor to 6. Group ID, and press ENT. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 222 ... Move the cursor to register the ID number and press ENT, then input the 9 digits ID (leftmost digit fixed to 0).

Upto 20 groups can be registered.

When finished, press CANCEL key. 5-12 043100001 7.5.6)Group ID No 9-digit ID number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 5.5.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for procedures on hold) When making a procedure on hold, the procedure is automatically terminated after the time set as follows. Settings & Registrations 7.5.7)Inactivity timeout 1.ACKed distress alert:OFF 2.RCVed other distress:OFF 3.Non-distress call :15min 4.Other communications:030sec 0.Back Procedure 111 ... Move the cursor to 7. Inactivity timeout, and press ENT. The screen as shown at right is displayed. Change the settings as appropriate. 1. ACKed distress alert The acknowledged distress alert events sent from the own ship:

- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes. 2. RCVed other distress The distress events of other ships

- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes. 3. Non-distress call Routine, safety and urgency events

- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes. 4. Other communications Communications without using DSC

- The range is 010 to 600 seconds. 5.5.7 Registering the DSC call list To call the station using the DSC, registers the station names, MMSI and the calling frequencies as follows. Procedure 111 ... Move the cursor to 8. DSC call list, and press ENT. The screen as shown at right is displayed. 222 ... Move the cursor to the line to be changed and press ENT to display the frequency list as shown at right. 333 ... Input data as appropriate using the numeric keypad or jog dial.

Upto 20 channels for every 20 stations can be registered.

When finished, press CANCEL key. MMSI 431000001 JRC Mitaka1 7.5.8)DSC call list No Station name 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 7.5.8)DSC call list(FRQ) Name:JRC Mitaka1 MMSI:431000001 No Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Category 01 02 03 04 05 06 2189.5 4208.0 4208.5 4209.0 2177.0 4219.5 4220.0 4220.5 RTN RTN RTN RTN 5-13 Settings & Registrations 5.6 Setting connections for options When setting connections between the controller and optional devices, such as a printer, configure the conditions as appropriate according to the device type, as follows. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through hierarchical menus, select 7.6 Option. 222 ... Move the cursor to the desired item, and press ENT. Move the cursor to the right. Then select the condition as appropriate and press ENT. 7.6)Option 1.Connection :None/CMD 2.Data out :---

3.Baudrate :---

4.Flow control :---

5.Print direction :---

0.Back 7.6)Option 1.Connection :None/CMD 2.Data out :---

3.Baudrate :---

4.Flow control :---

5.Print direction :---

0.Back Note

- The content and the selectable conditions of each item are as follows. Item Name Content Connection Connection status and printer type Selectable conditions

( : Factory default) None/CMD/ Serial PRN/

NKG-800/ DTE Data out Printing method for DSC messages

---/ Auto/ Manual Baudrate Transmission speed to printer

---/ 4.8k/ 9.6k/ 38.4k/ 57.6kbps Flow control Handshake setting with printer

---/ None/ Hard Print direction Printing sequence of lines

---/ Upright/ Invert

- When connecting a serial printer (e.g. NKG-91), set the items as follows:

1.Connection 2.Data out 3.Baudrate 4.Flow control 5.Print direction

:Serial PRN

:Auto

:4.8k

:Hard

:Invert (NKG-91)/Upright (DPU-414)

- When connecting the NKG-800 printer, set the items as follows:

1.Connection 2.Data out

:NKG-800

:Auto

- If no option is connected, select None/CMD at the Connection. Note) When None/CMD is set, connect nothing to the serial port.

- When connecting the data terminal to the controller for the telex communication, set Connection item to DTE. Note that restart the system just after this setting. Moreover, Baudrate, Flow control and Print direction become unchangeable in this case. 5-14 Settings & Registrations 5.7 Setting of data terminal The following describes the procedure regarding LCD adjustment, such as the color settings and brightness, and registration of the station list. 5.7.1 LCD adjustment Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used. 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select System Config with Enter key. The setting conditions concerning to the screen are displayed. L C D / L E D d i m m e r C o n f i g L C D / L E D d i m m e r ( 0 - 1 5 ) : 1 3 L C D / L E D d i m m e r b u t t o n s e t t i n g S c r e e n s a v e r s e t t i n g

- F u n c t i o n O N / O F F : O N

- S t a r t i n g t i m e ( 1 - 1 5 ) : 3 m i n u t e s D i s p l a y c o l o r p a t t e r n : O c e a n D a y U s e r d e f i n e d c o l o r s e t t i n g 333 ... Select the item to be changed by the cursor and press Enter key, then input the

- B a c k g r o u n d c o l o r o f m a i n d i s p l a y : G r e e n

- T e x t c o l o r o f m a i n d i s p l a y : W h i t e

- B a c k g r o u n d c o l o r o f H & F d i s p l a y : L i m e

- T e x t c o l o r o f H & F d i s p l a y : N a v y

- S h o r t c u t c h a r a c t e r c o l o r : O r a n g e S e t C a n c e l appropriate condition. Set the item using the numeric keypad or dropdown menu, where the cursor moves to the right as shown at right. As for other items, the specific menu is displayed. 5-15 Settings & Registrations 444 ... When completing the setting, move the cursor to the Set and press Enter key. Note The content of each setting item is as follows. Item Content of setting Remarks LCD/LED dimmer (0-15) Adjusts the brightness of the LCD and the panel lamp by 16 steps. LCD/LED dimmer button setting Sets the brightness of the LCD and the panel lamp when using the DIM key on the panel. Screensaver setting

- Function ON/OFF Sets the screen saver ON/OFF. Without using this menu, the dimmer is adjustable with Ctrl+ or Ctrl+ operation.

- Starting time (1-15) Sets the time until the screensaver starts. Display color pattern User defined color setting

- Background color of main display

- Text color of main display

- Background color of H&F display

- Text color of H&F display

- Shortcut character color Sets the color of the screen from the following 9 patterns of the dropdown list.

- Ocean Day/ Dusk/ Night

- Earth Day/ Dusk/ Night

- Basic Black/ White

- User defined Sets the background color of the main screen from the following. Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange Sets the text color of the main screen from the following. Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange Sets the background color of the header/footer screen from the following. Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange Sets the text color of the header/

footer screen from the following. Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange Sets the shortcut character color from the following. Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange 5-16 The screensaver is invalid at the following cases;

communicating in the telex mode, running self-diagnosis. This menu is valid only when Display color pattern = User defined. Setting the same color with the main screen or the short cut character is inhibited. This menu is valid only when Display color pattern = User defined. Setting the same color with the background of the main screen is inhibited. This menu is valid only when Display color pattern = User defined. Setting the same color with the text of the header/footer screen is inhibited. This menu is valid only when Display color pattern = User defined. Setting the same color with the background of the header/footer screen is inhibited. This menu is valid only when Display color pattern = User defined. Setting the same color with the background of the main screen is inhibited. Settings & Registrations 5.7.2 Registering station list Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used. 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Service Station list with Enter key. 1 S t a t i o n 0 1 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 N 3 3 4 5 ' E 1 3 8 1 2 ' D O T D O T The station list is displayed. S t a t i o n l i s t N o . S t a t i o n N a m e I D L o c a t i o n F . S i g 1 S t a t i o n 0 1 0 0 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 N 3 3 4 5 ' E 1 3 8 1 2 ' D O T D O T [ E d i t ]

2 S t a t i o n 0 2 0 0 4 3 1 1 2 3 4 N 3 7 2 2 ' E 1 3 5 5 1 ' D O T D O T [ E r a s e ]

3 S t a t i o n 0 3 4 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 [ P r i n t ]

4 [ C a n c e l ]

5 6 7 8 9 1 0 333 ... Select the line to be registered newly or to be changed with the cursor and press Enter key. Then input the station information including the channels on the station list edit screen.

Input the radio station name within 16 characters to Station Name column.

(The @ character is unavailable.)

Input 4 (coast station), 5 (ships station) or 9 digits SELCAL number to Station ID column.

The Location and Free CH Sig are optional.

Move the cursor to the line to be registered and press Enter key. Then input the Tx/Rx frequencies on the popup screen at right. 444 ... After inputting, press Enter key to close the screen and finish the registration. 5-17 Settings & Registrations Note There is the station database menu (Service Station database) as a similar registration menu to register the station information. The station database operation is basically the same with the station list. However note that the station list is designed for the manual input only, but the station database is designed to register the station information more easily such as copying the original station database prepared in advance. The functions available on the station database screen are as follows. Program Registers the station information located with cursor to the desired line of the station list. the Read Reads the station database saved in the flash ROM or the USB memory. Write Saves the prepared station database in another drive or the folder. Get Loads station information of the station list on a line of the station database. 5-18 Settings & Registrations 5.8 Setting telex mode The following describes the procedure to check or set the condition for the telex communication. Procedure 111 ... If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard. The operation of the data terminal becomes possible in the telex mode, except when the controller is used. 222 ... On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select System NBDP setup with Enter key. The setting conditions concerning to the telex communication are displayed. 333 ... Select the item to be changed with the cursor, and press Enter key. The input screen as shown at right is displayed. An example of Max. FEC error rate S e t u p d a t a i n p u t M a x . F E C e r r o r r a t e : [ 3 0 ] %

I n p u t r a n g e i s f r o m 1 t o 1 0 0 . M a x . F E C e r r o r r a t e S e t C a n c e l 444 ... Press Enter key to move the cursor to the right. Then input the value and press Enter key again. The cursor moves to Set. S e t u p d a t a i n p u t M a x . F E C e r r o r r a t e : [ 3 0 ] %

I n p u t r a n g e i s f r o m 1 t o 1 0 0 . S e t C a n c e l S e t 5-19 Settings & Registrations 555 ... When the cursor is located on Set, press Enter key to set the value and close the popup screen. 666 ... After completing the every input, move the cursor to Set and press Enter key to save and finish the registration. Note

- When selecting the Initialize with the cursor and pressing Enter key, the every accessible item is reset to the factory default setting.

-

The content of each item and the factory default setting values are as follows. Item Setting contents ARQ/FEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID Registers the SELCAL number. 4-digit is for the coast station. Initial value

-----

Remarks When setting this item, contact our company or agency. GFEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID Registers the group ID. 4-digit is for the coast station

-----

ARQ/FEC 9-digit Self-ID 9-digit SELCAL number for reference.

-----

Common with the DSC GFEC 9-digit Self-ID Registers the 9-digit group ID.

-----

Answerback Registers the answerback code used with WRU and Hereis.

-----

When setting this item, contact our company or agency. Max. FEC error rate Sets the permissible error rate that occurs during CFEC receiving. 30 %

Max. automatic call series Sets times to retry calling a station if failed to call the station using the CALL function. 2 Optional Collective FEC receiving Sets ON/OFF of the CFEC or SFEC receiving. ON Time duration for AUTO Sets the interval time until retrying if failed to call a coast station using the AUTOTELEX function. 10 min Optional Restart Finite start/restart Sets ON/OFF of disconnected function communication in ARQ mode. the if rephasing the Sets ON/OFF of the limit of the ARQ call times, which is 128 times for phasing and 32 for rephasing. times ON ON Transmitter pre-key time Sets a period between key on and starting the signal output. 10 ms 5-20 Maintenance & Inspection 6. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION The performance and lifetime of the equipment depend on appropriate maintenance. This chapter describes an outline of maintenance and inspection, self diagnosis and troubleshooting. 6.1 General maintenance & inspection In order to operate the equipment under optimum conditions, it is vital to perform regular inspections and also, to keep accurate records. Inspections enable problems to be identified before they become major malfunctions. The following inspections should be made regularly. Inspection sequence Inspection item Procedure Antenna system Check that antennas and the connectors are secure. RF GAIN function In the radiotelephone mode (TEL), turn the RF GAIN control on the controller having access rights. Is the radio static (noise) from the speaker adjustable?

Receiver condition check by speaker output Check that the voice level and noise level are not abnormally loud or soft. Handset PTT switch Transmission and reception check by performing radio communication Condition of the data terminal the radiotelephone (TEL) mode, press In the PTT switch, and check that the unit transmits immediately on the Tx meter or by TX and ON displayed on the screen. In the radiotelephone (TEL) mode, check that normal conversation is possible. When the communication mode is other than the telex mode (e.g. TEL mode), check that the communication mode can be set to the telex mode by pressing the Enter key on the keyboard of the data terminal. Air filter Check that if the air filters of the power supply and/or the battery charger are clogged with dust. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6-1 Maintenance & Inspection 6.2 Self diagnosis inspection The following describes the procedure for performing self diagnosis in the 6.1 Self diagnosis menu. Procedure 111 ... Press FUNC 8TEST . 6.1)Self diagnosis The 6.1 Self diagnosis menu is displayed. 222 ... Select Transceiver, Controller/DTE, or DSC/NBDP loop.

When Transceiver is selected, the screen at right is displayed.

For DSC/NBDP loop, a shortcut menu for diagnosing the modem is as shown in the screen at right. 333 ... In the above screen, press ENT, select the diagnosis mode with the jog dial, and press ENT. Self diagnosis is performed. The following test modes are available:

6.1.1) Transceiver ........ ALL (all modes) TRX&MODEM PA&ATU WKR MODEM TRX PA ATU 6.1.2) Controller/DTE ... ALL (all modes) DGT CKT AF output LCD&LED Speaker Printer DTE 1.Transceiver 2.Controller/DTE 3.Transceiver log 4.Controller/DTE log 5.DSC/NBDP loop 6.Printout :Valid 0.Back 6.1.1)Transceiver Target :ALL

- ATU -

1.Serial I/F :

2.RBK port :

3.Band1 input :

4.Band1 tune :

5.Band2 input :

6.Band2 tune :

7.Band3 input :

6.1.1)Transceiver Target :TRX&MODEM

- ATU -

1.Serial I/F :

2.RBK port :

3.Band1 input :

4.Band1 tune :

5.Band2 input :

6.Band2 tune :

7.Band3 input :

6.1.1)Transceiver Target :ATU

- ATU -

1.Serial I/F :OK 2.RBK port :Checking 3.Band1 input :

4.Band1 tune :

5.Band2 input :

6.Band2 tune :

7.Band3 input :

Note

-

If the jog dial is turned while the cursor is at Target when Transceiver is selected, the diagnosis items of each unit and previous diagnosis results can be browsed.

- To cancel self diagnosis midway, press the CANCEL key.

- The results of the self diagnosis are stored as a log, and up to 10 logs can be confirmed from the 6.1.3 Transceiver log or 6.1.4 Controller/DTE log menu.

- The self diagnosis results are printed out on the connected printer as the factory default setting. However note that the print format is selectable from Valid (the target name and the results of diagnosis items), Simple (the target name and the result), and Invalid (Not print) using the menu 6.1.1 Printout.

- The self diagnosis test contents and results are as shown below. However note that if PA and/or ATU is in below freezing conditions, to avoid the failure of the moving part, the FAN is not checked and -(hyphen) is shown as the result. 6-2 Unit Name Test Item Contents Results Maintenance & Inspection ATU

Serial I/F

RBK port

Band1 input

Band1 tune

Band2 input

Band2 tune

Band3 input

Band3 tune

Band4 input

Band4 tune

Band5 input

Band5 tune

Band6 input

Band6 tune

Fan

PA mute port

:Serial communication

:RBK interface

:2140 kHz input value

:2140 kHz tuning operation

:4149 kHz input value

:4149 kHz tuning operation

:6230 kHz input value

:6230 kHz tuning operation

:8297 kHz input value

:8297 kHz tuning operation

:16546 kHz input value

:16546 kHz tuning operation

:25118 kHz input value

:25118 kHz tuning operation

:Air cooling fan operation

:Confirmation of PA diagnosis viability

:RBK overcurrent detection

:EEPROM1 operation

:EEPROM2 operation

:2140 kHz output from DA

:PA (A) idling current

:PA (A) output

:PA (B) idling current *

:PA (B) output *

RBK port

Memory1

Memory2

PA(A) voltage :PA (A) PS voltage

PA(B) voltage :PA (B) PS voltage *

DA output

PA(A) bias

PA(A) output

PA(B) bias

PA(B) output

PA(A)+(B) output :Combined PA output *

LPF band1 output :2140kHz output

LPF band2 output :3023kHz output

LPF band3 output :4149kHz output

LPF band4 output :6230kHz output

LPF band5 output :8297kHz output

LPF band6 output :12365kHz output

LPF band7 output :16546kHz output

LPF band8 output :25118kHz output

Fan1

Fan2

Fan3

Memory

Digital CKT

BK port

PLL lock

: Air cooling fan1 operation

: Air cooling fan2 operation *

: Air cooling fan3 operation

:EEPROM operation

:FPGA operation

:BK signal state

:State of PLL for DDS/DUC clock Transceiver PA TRX

Band1-TX output :1600 kHz output

Band2-TX output :22000 kHz output

Band3-TX output :27500 kHz output

Band4-TX output :RX diagnosis circuit

Band1-RX BPF1 :1600 kHz Rx level

Band2-RX BPF2 :390 kHz Rx level

Band3-RX BPF3 :1590 kHz Rx level

Band4-RX BPF4 :3190 kHz Rx level

Band5-RX BPF5 :6090 kHz Rx level

Band6-RX BPF6 :10490 kHz Rx level

Band7-RX BPF7 :17990 kHz Rx level

Band8-RX BPF8 :27500 kHz Rx level OK: Normal NG: Abnormal OK: Normal NG: Abnormal

*500W model only OK: Normal NG: Abnormal 6-3 Maintenance & Inspection Transceiver

(Contd) WKR MODEM

:FROM operation

:EEPROM operation

:SDRAM operation

:State of PLL for DDS clock

Memory1

Memory2

Memory3

PLL lock

Band1-RX BPF1 :2187.5 kHz DSC loop

Band2-RX BPF2 :4207.5 kHz DSC loop

Band3-RX BPF3 :6312.0 kHz DSC loop

Band4-RX BPF4 :8414.5 kHz DSC loop

Band5-RX BPF5 :12577.0 kHz DSC loop

Band6-RX BPF6 :16804.5 kHz DSC loop

Band7-RX BPF7 :Wide-band filter operation

DSC/NBDP loop1 :AF modem loop

DSC/NBDP loop2 :AF modem & TRX loop OK: Normal NG: Abnormal Unit Name Test Item Contents Results DGT CKT

Memory1

Memory2

Memory3

:FROM operation

:EEPROM operation

:SDRAM operation AF output AF connection to TRX OK: Normal NG: Abnormal OK: Normal NG: Abnormal Screen and ALM lamp display operation LCD&LED Note: Check visually if every dot and red and green ALM lamp alternately work normally for 3 seconds. DONE Sound test Speaker Note: Check if the 1500 Hz tone sounds correctly. After that, press ENT on the popup screen to finish this process. DONE Controller/

Data terminal Printer Print out test Note: When the printer is connected, check the print result in the printed data output. DONE DTE memory1 DTE memory2

:FROM operation

:SDRAM operation OK: Normal NG: Abnormal DTE LCD&LED

:Data terminal screen and lamp operation DTE Note: Check visually if every dot alternating colors of red, green, blue and white with the lamp blink work normally for 5 seconds. DONE DTE buzzer

:DTE buzzer operation Note: Check if the buzzer sounds correctly. After 3 seconds, sounding stops automatically DONE 6-4 Maintenance & Inspection 6.3 System alarm indication This equipment displays alarms as follows when an internal or external error is detected. Alarm information PA :001,Overcurrent(A) PA :008,High-temp Note

-

To return to the previous screen after the alarm is displayed, press the CANCEL key.

- When the TRX 024.PLL unlock or WKR MODEM 030.PLL unlock alarm is occurring, that mark remains as shown below until the equipment is restored to normal conditions. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 RX TX S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

U n l o c k kHz U n l o c k N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

6-5 Maintenance & Inspection 6.3.1 Alarm list The following list shows the types of system alarms and contents when an alarm is detected on the equipment. Display Contents Overcurrent (A) Overload (A) Overcurrent (B) *

Overload (B) *

SWR/Overload High-temp Detected an overcurrent (6.8A at AC, or 5.1A at DC) in the PA(A). Detected the condition SWR > 3 in the PA(A). Detected an overcurrent (6.8A at AC, or 5.1A at DC) in the PA(B). Detected the condition SWR > 3 in the PA(B). Detected the condition SWR > 3 or overload at the PA output. On TX, detected high temp (99C or more) at the radiator in the PA unit. RBK overcurrent Detected RBK overcurrent. High-VDD (A) Low-VDD (A) High-VDD (B) *

Low-VDD (B) *

DA high-temp High-temp (A) High-temp (B) *

Detected overvoltage (132V or more) at the drain of the FET in the PA(A). Detected low voltage (80V or less) at the drain of the PA(A) FET. Detected overvoltage (132V or more) at the drain of the FET in the PA(B). Detected low voltage (80V or less) at the drain of the PA(B) FET. Detected high temperature (95C or more) at the radiator of the DA. Detected high temperature (99C or more) at the radiator of the PA(A). Detected high temperature (99C or more) at the radiator of the PA(B). EEPROM (PA) Detected the PA memory error. EEPROM

(PACONT) PS PS for PA ATU lost High voltage High-temp Overcurrent DISP_KEY EXT_KEY SEL_BK

-BK PLL unlock PLL unlock Detected a memory error at the PA CONTROL UNIT. Detected abnormal condition (high temp/voltage) of the PS for PA. Detected a serial communication error with the tuner. Detected a high voltage (3.5 kV or more) in antenna output. Detected an out-of-range temperature

(70C or more) inside the enclosure. Detected an overcurrent at the antenna. Detected abnormal ON signal at the PTT or Ext key of the controller. Detected abnormal ON signal at the transceiver external key. Detected abnormal ON signal at the Selcall key on the transceiver. Detected during transmission. Detected PLL unlock for the DDS or DUC clock. Detected PLL unlock for the DDS clock.

-BK output error the MCDSP WDT Detected MCDSP malfunction. VDSP WDT Detected VDSP malfunction. Source Unit PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA ATU ATU ATU ATU TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX WKR MODEM WKR MODEM WKR MODEM Alarm Number 001 002 003 004 007 008 010 011 012 013 014 066 067 068 070 091 071 017 018 019 072 020 021 022 023 024 030 031 032 6-6

(*) 500W model only Troubleshooting Procedure Re-tune or operate on another frequency. Re-tune or operate on another frequency. Re-tune or operate on another frequency. Re-tune or operate on another frequency. Re-tune or operate on another frequency. Stop transmission, or reduce output. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Stop transmission, or reduce output. Stop transmission, or reduce output. Stop transmission, or reduce output. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Re-tune, or output. Stop transmission, or reduce output. Re-tune, or output. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. reduce reduce Maintenance & Inspection 033 094 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 047 048 050 051 052 095 096 WKR MODEM WKR MODEM MMSI lost Memory Controller CTRL1 RBK OC Controller CTRL1 PTT Controller CTRL1 CW KEY Controller CTRL1 EXT KEY Controller CTRL2 RBK OC Controller CTRL2 PTT Controller CTRL2 CW KEY Controller CTRL2 EXT KEY Controller PA lost Controller TRX lost Controller MODEM lost Controller CTRL1 lost Controller CTRL2 lost Controller CTRL1 memory Controller CTRL2 memory 059 Data terminal My/OTH DTE lost 060 Data terminal My/OTH DTE lost 062 Data terminal My/OTH DTE USB-IC 063 Data terminal My/OTH DTE USB-IC Detected non-registration or loss of the ship's MMSI. Detected a memory error. the the Detected an overcurrent on RBK circuit of controller 1. Detected an error on the PTT control line of controller 1. Detected an error on the CW key control line of controller 1. Detected an error on the external key control line of controller 1. Detected an overcurrent on RBK circuit of controller 2. Detected an error on the PTT control line of controller 2. Detected an error on the CW key control line of controller 2. Detected an error on the external key control line of controller 2. Detected a serial communication error with the PA. Detected a serial communication error with the TRX. Detected a serial communication error with the WKR MODEM. Detected a serial communication error with the No.1 controller. Detected a serial communication error with the No.2 controller. Detected a memory error on the No.1 controller. Detected a memory error on the No.2 controller. Detected a serial communication error between controller (ID:1) and DTE. Note) My or OTH indicates the that data relationship between terminal the controller displaying this alarm. Detected a serial communication error between controller (ID:2) and DTE. Note) My or OTH indicates the that data relationship between terminal the controller displaying this alarm. Detected the SPI communication error at the USB circuit of the data terminal connected to the controller (ID:1). Note) My or OTH indicates the that data relationship between terminal the controller displaying this alarm. Detected the SPI communication error at the USB circuit of the data terminal connected to the controller (ID:2). Note) My or OTH indicates the that data relationship between terminal the controller displaying this alarm. and and and and Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. Check the data terminal cable connection, or the condition of the data terminal. Check the data terminal cable connection, or the condition of the data terminal. Please contact JRC or our agency. Please contact JRC or our agency. 6-7 Maintenance & Inspection Also, the following alarms are displayed when an error is detected just after turning on the equipment. Please notify JRC or our agency of the details of the alarm. Display Contents the initial set after restarting as Detected this controller's barcode number lost!

So required to replace the CONTROL UNIT in it with the new one. Detected this controller's SIO error!

So required maintenance mode. Detected this controller's address setting error!

So required initial set after restarting as maintenance mode. Detected MMSI lost!

So concerned DSC functions no longer available now. Detected PA UNIT lost or this controller's SIO error!

So required initial set after restarting as maintenance mode. Detected TRX UNIT lost!

So concerned all functions no longer available now. the the Detected an error in the barcode number on the controller. Detected a communication error between controller and transceiver at startup. the Detected starting the controller. this controller's address error when Unregistered MMSI, or lost the MMSI. Detected malfunction the PA communication error on the controller. of unit or Detected TRX unit malfunction. 6-8 Maintenance & Inspection 6.3.2 Viewing the alarm history The following describes how to view alarm information detected by the equipment or a history of past occurring alarms in the 6.2 Alarm information menu. Procedure 111 ... Press the MENU key, and through 6.2)Alarm information hierarchical menus, select 6.2 Alarm information. One of the screens shown at right is displayed indicating if an alarm is occurring. Note The displayed alarm information is formatted as follows.

[Unit Name] : [Alarm Number], [Information]

222 ... To check the alarm history, press ENT. The popup screen at right is displayed, select OK. 333 ... The alarm history is displayed. Up to 100 of the latest histories are stored. If necessary, scroll with the jog dial. Note The displayed alarm history is formatted as follows.

[Number] [Alarm & recovery time] [A: Alarm/V: Recovery]

[Unit name] : [Alarm number], [Information]

No data Press ENT to view alarm history.

(If there is no alarm) 6.2)Alarm information PA :001,Overcurrent(A) PA :008,High-temp Press ENT to view alarm history.

(If there is an alarm) 6.2)Alarm information View alarm history?

[ OK ] [Cancel]

No data Press ENT to view alarm history. Alarm history 1.2008-12-31 23:59 A PA :001,Overcurrent(A) 2.2008-12-31 23:59 A PA :008,High-temp 3.2008-11-30 22:45 V ATU :019,High-temp 4.2008-11-28 22:11 V ATU :018,High voltage 6-9 Maintenance & Inspection 6.4 Software version Procedure To view the version of the software currently running on the equipment, press the MENU key, and display 6.3 Software version in the menu list.

Each software version of the transceiver, the controller and the data terminal is displayed as shown at right.

Besides above, the software version of the data terminal is displayed through the Help menu. 6.3)Software version

- Controller :05.00

- WKR MODEM :03.00

- TRX :01.00

- PA :01.00

- ATU :01.00

- DTE :01.00 0.Back 6-10 Maintenance & Inspection 6.5 Troubleshooting WARNING is used for both distress communication and This equipment communication. Contact JRC or our agent if any problem is observed in this unit during routine operation or inspection. Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits. Inspection or repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may result in fire, electrical shock, or malfunction. If internal inspection or repair is necessary, contact our service center or agents. routine 6.5.1 Procedures for locating malfunctions 1) First, check the power supply voltage and connectors. 2) If there are no problems with the above, use a tester to check for errors. The following table shows the instruments required for performing repairs and the severity of malfunctions. If the user is to locate the malfunction himself, perform only No. 1 and No. 2. No. Type of Malfunction Examples 1 Faults requiring no instrument to locate Faulty connector contacts Broken antenna cables Defective switches, controls, etc. Other problems that can be visually detected 2 Malfunctions that can be discovered and repaired with a tester Confirmation of power supply voltage Breaks in external wiring 3 Malfunctions requiring special instrument Fan malfunction in transceiver and ATU enclosure fan Crystal oscillator frequency deviation Decrease in transmitting power and reception Decrease in transmitter modulation level Malfunction in semiconductors, ICs, and similar sensitivity devices 6-11 Maintenance & Inspection 6.5.2 Guide to locating faults Use the following table as a guide to locating the causes of malfunctions in the equipment. Also, when contacting JRC or our agency, please notify us of the malfunction conditions. No. Symptom Typical causes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Nothing is displayed on the controller or the data terminal screen.

Malfunction in the controller or data terminal cable

Abnormal power supply voltage

Malfunction in the power switch, display circuit or control circuit TX and ON is displayed but no voice is transmitted in the TEL mode.

Malfunction in the handset

Malfunction in the controller cable

Malfunction in the AF signal transmission circuit TX is displayed but ON is not, and transmission is not possible.

Malfunction in the transmission circuit TX and ON are displayed, and transmission is not possible. Reception sensitivity is poor. Little or no sound from the speaker, both static and voices. Radio static (noise) is output from the speaker, but cannot receive transmissions from other stations.

Malfunction in the handset PTT switch (TEL mode)

Malfunction in the electrical key connection (CW mode)

Malfunction in the transmission circuit

Antenna damage

Break or short circuit of antenna cable

Malfunction in the antenna connectors

Malfunction in the receiver circuit

Malfunction in the speaker

Malfunction in the receiver circuit

Antenna damage

Break or short circuit of antenna cable

Malfunction in the antenna connectors

Malfunction in the receiver Note The following are not faults. Symptom Possible Causes Handling Both Tx & Rx functions are invalid, and the SIG meter indicates off-the-scale. The VOL control, the dimmer, and PWR key on the controller are valid but functions such as the RF GAIN control are invalid. No response from other station via radiotelephone or DSC call. When multiple controllers are connected, access rights cannot be obtained by pressing ENT on a monitor controller. If the system is left on a screen other than the status display for a while, the screen returns to the status display. The received distress call log has been erased without operation. The external BK line is ON. Stop operating the external equipment. Multiple controllers are connected, and another controller has access rights. Press ENT to obtain access rights, and after that, retry the operation. No operator in that station, or unavailable to respond due to other duties. Wait and retry later. Another controller with higher priority is in use for communicating or is performing menu operations. After operations on the other controller are finished, obtain access rights. The inactivity timer is activated and the menu is closed. Set the timer with the 7.3.6 Menu shutdown. Automatically deleted the received distress calls of 48 hours old after that reception. (IMO A.806(19)) Or the equipment had been turned off by such as the breaker on the power supply. Print and save received messages if necessary. When turning on the data terminal, the start screen is displayed. But after that, nothing is displayed. The dimmer level is adjusted to 0 with such as Ctrl+ operation. Adjust the dimmer level with the DIM key on the panel of the data terminal or Ctrl+ operation. 6-12 Maintenance & Inspection 6.5.3 Consumables The following shows consumables. Please contact JRC or our agency to order parts. Location Description Model (Part number) Replacement Guide NKG-91 PRINTER Printer paper 7ZPJD0384 DPU-414 PRINTER Printer paper 6ZCAF00252A Indicating paper edge red mark on the NKG-800 PRINTER Printer paper 5ZPCM00020 Ink ribbon (SP-16051) 5ZZCM00003 When print becomes light 6.5.4 Repair units/parts The repair units and replacement part units are as follows.

NTD-2250/ 2500 TRANSCEIVER Description Model (Part number) Notes PA CONTROL UNIT PA UNIT LPF UNIT EXTERNAL UNIT TRX UNIT WKR MODEM UNIT CMC-2425/ 2450 CAH-2425/ 2450 CFJ-2425/ 2450 CQD-2419 CMN-2250 CMJ-2250

NBD-2250/ 2500 POWER SUPPLY Common for 250W and 500W Common for 250W and 500W Common for 250W and 500W Description Model (Part number) Notes DC_DC UNIT PA_PS UNIT FILTER UNIT Air filter CBG-2415 CBG-2416 CBL-2415 MTZ304438A Common for 250W and 500W Common for 250W and 500W Note) 2pcs for 500W Common for 250W and 500W Everlight scott filter

NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER Description Model (Part number) Notes CONTROL UNIT AF CONT UNIT LCD UNIT MAIN PANEL UNIT SUB PANEL UNIT SPEAKER CONTROLLER CABLE CDJ-3775 CMV-3775 CDE-3770 CCK-3775 CCK-3776 7USJD0007 7ZCJD0343 Control cable (5 m) 6-13 Maintenance & Inspection

NFC-2250/ 2500 ANTENNA TUNER Description Model (Part number) Notes MATCHING UNIT MATCHING A UNIT MATCHING B UNIT ANT SW UNIT TUNER CONT CFG-2250 CFG-2500 CFG-2503 CSD-2250/ 2500 CDJ-2525

NDZ-227 DATA TERMINAL For 250W only For 500W only For 500W only Common for 250W and 500W Description Model (Part number) Notes PROCESS CIRCUIT INTERFACE UNIT COLOR LCD UNIT LCD I/F UNIT USB I/F UNIT CDC-1346B CMH-3227 CCN-3227 CQC-1262 CQD-3227

NBB-714 BATTERY CHARGER 10.4 inch Description Model (Part number) Notes AC fuse NBB714_Dustfilter NBB714_Fan 7ZFJD0002 NBB714-FIL NBB714-FAN

NBB-724 BATTERY CHARGER Description Model (Part number) NBB724_Dustfilter NBB724_Fan NBB724-FIL NBB724-FAN 6.5.5 Regular replacement parts 10A Notes The following shows parts that need to be replaced regularly. Please contact JRC or our agency to order parts. Description Model (Part number) Replacement Period Cooling fan for PA and PS 7BZJD0006 Cooling fan for ATU 7BZJD0008 LCD unit for controller CDE-3770 LCD unit for data terminal CCN-3227 Approx. 50,000 hours of use at room temperature Approx. 50,000 hours of use at room temperature Approx. 20,000 hours of continued use at maximum brightness Approx. 50,000 hours of continued use at maximum brightness 6-14 7. AFTER-SALES SERVICE After-Sales Service Warranty The warranty period is determined by JRC's warranty regulations, but is normally 1 year from the date of purchase. Additionally, the warranty except for the body text is submitted to contractual agreements. Repair Part Inventory Period Parts necessary for proper functioning of this equipment will be kept available for 10 years after product discontinuation. When Requesting Repairs If what appears to be a defect is detected, refer to "6.5 Troubleshooting" to check if the equipment is actually defective. If the problem is due to a defect, immediately stop use of the system and contact the store where you purchased the system, or one of our branches.

During the warranty period , if a malfunction occurs with the equipment while in standard usage in accordance with this instruction manual, we or our agencies will repair the malfunction at no charge at the store where the equipment was purchased or another the malfunction occurs due to improper usage, fault (including the use of the virus-

infected USB flash memory), or any external abnormal condition such as fire, pollution, abnormal voltage, natural disaster (ex. thunder storms, earthquake) etc., JRC will repair the equipment for a fee. Furthermore, regardless of the warranty period, orders of consumables will be charged. location specified by JRC. If After the warranty expires , we will repair the malfunction for a fee, if repair is possible. Please inform us of the following :

Product name, model name, manufactured date, serial number As much information as you can provide about the malfunction (alarm number, whether transmission is possible or not, etc.) Your company or organization name, address, and phone number Periodical Maintenance Recommendation Depending on the usage conditions, with extended use, the performance of this equipment may degrade over time, and externally installed parts such as the antenna may degrade due to vibration, so we recommend periodical maintenance in addition to the standard maintenance. Please contact the store where you purchased the equipment, or one of our branches, to request periodical maintenance. Periodical maintenance requires a service charge. If you have any questions regarding after-sales service, please contact the store where you purchased the equipment, or one of our branches. Refer to the inside of the back cover for contact numbers and locations. 7-1 Disposal 8. DISPOSAL Observe all rules and regulations of the local authorities when disposing of this equipment. 8-1 9. SPECIFICATIONS Specifications 9.1 JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF Radio Equipment

General Specifications Transmission frequency Reception frequency Frequency stability Type of emission 1605.0 - 27500.0 kHz (100 Hz steps) 90.0 - 29999.9 kHz (100 Hz steps) Channels Scan channels Nominal frequency Communication method in TEL Antenna impedance Channel switching duration Interface Compass safety distance Main controls Performance criteria Power supply voltage Current consumption

(JSS-2250/ 2500)

: J3E

: F1B

: A1A

: H3E

: H2B

: J2D Within 10 Hz TEL mode DSC/TLX mode CW mode AM mode H2B mode DATA mode User channels (TEL/DSC/CW) : Max. 400 ch (20 ch x 20 grp)

: Max. 400 ch (20 ch x 20 sta) User channels (TLX) ITU preset channels

: 1722 ch Max. 20 channels (group specification method) J3E/ A1A/ H3E/ H2B/ J2D F1B Push-to-talk (simplex, semi-duplex) 50 unbalanced 15 sec or less IEC61162-1 (GPS/AME/RMS) 2.0 m DSC call (sending and receiving), communication freq/

channel settings, Tx power settings, RF gain adjustment, volume adjustment, LCD adjustment IMO A.806(19), A.694(17), MSC68(68), MSC/Circ.862 IEC 60945 Ed.4 2002-08 90 VAC to 132 VAC, 180 VAC to 264 VAC 24 VDC (21.6 VDC to 31.2 VDC) Transmission

: Carrier frequencies

: Assigned frequency AC 24VDC AC 24VDC

/ 3kVA

/ 40A

: 2kVA

: 40A

: 0.5kVA / 0.5kVA

: 6A

/ 6A Reception Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Humidity resistance Vibration resistance (3 axes)

-30 to +55oC (-15 to +55 oC during normal operation)

-30 to +55C (parts exposed to condensation -30 to +70C) No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40C, 93%RH 2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz

: Full amplitude 1 mm10%

: Max acceleration 7 m/s2 fixed 13.2 Hz to 100 Hz No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz for 2 hours Continuous operation (TEL) No abnormality after operating continuously for 8 hours Continuous operation (DSC,WKR) No abnormality after operating continuously for 24 hours Category type of the weather resistance Protection rating Dimensions and mass (approx)

(JSS-2250/ 2500) Antenna tuner and the junction box Other units IP22 equivalent (controller panel) Main unit (Incase of the NCU-515A Rack) 520mm(W) x 665mm(H) x 450mm(D) [ex. projections], 90kg/96kg Antenna tuner 395mm(W) x 622mm(H) x 198mm(D) [ex. projections], 10kg/10kg MF/HF controller 230mm(W) x 142mm(H) x 89mm(D) [ex. projections], 1.3kg Data terminal 336mm(W) x 244mm(H) x 88mm(D) [ex. projections], 4.6kg

: Exposed

: Protected 9-1 Specifications Transmitter

Antenna output power

(JSS-2250/ 2500) Modulation method Occupied bandwidth Carrier suppression (J3E) Unwanted emissions in the out-of-band domain

(JSS-2250/ 2500) Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain Overall distortion and noise AF frequency response Tone frequency

Receiver Receiving system 1st IF 2nd IF Reception frequency stability Sensitivity (SINAD 20dB) Pass band/Adjacent signal selectivity Spurious response Blocking/Desensitization 9-2

/ 400Wpep

/ 100Wpep

/ 500Wpep

/ 150Wpep AC 200Wpep 24VDC 100Wpep AC 250Wpep 24VDC 150Wpep 1605.0

- 3999.9 kHz 4000.0

- 27500.0 kHz Low-power stage balanced modulation J3E/ J2D/ H2B F1B/ A1A 40 dB or more Mean power of 50 mW or lower, or 67/70 dB or more lower than the mean power of the basic frequency

: Within 3 kHz

: Within 0.5 kHz

: 28/28 dB or more

: 35/35 dB or more

: 64/67 dB or more

: 28/28 dB or more

: 35/35 dB or more

: 67/70 dB or more JSS-2250/2500 At J3E:

1.5 to 4.5 kHz 4.5 to 7.5 kHz 7.5 kHz and upwards At F1B:

0.25 to 0.5 kHz 0.50 to 1.25 kHz 1.25 kHz and upwards And following Attenuation [dB]

Mistuned frequency [Hz]

-20 dB or less Deviation is within 6 dB in 350 Hz to 2700 Hz range. 1500 Hz or 1400 Hz Double superheterodyne 70.036 MHz 36 kHz Within 10 Hz J3E F1B A1A J3E 2.1 kHz

: 270 - 300Hz 550 Hz

: 2.5 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)

: 0.7 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)

: 1.4 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)

: 2.4 - 3.0 kHz

(6 dB bandwidth) within

(66 dB bandwidth)

(6 dB bandwidth) within

(60 dB bandwidth)

: 60 dB or more

: Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted signal level of 10 uV and an unwanted signal level of 31.6 mV separated by 750 Hz the

: When an unwanted signal level separated by 3 kHz is added to the wanted signal level of 10 uV, voltage suppressing output of the wanted signal by 3 dB is 10 mV or more. unwanted signal input

: Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted signal level of 10 uV and an unwanted signal level of 1 mV separated by 500 Hz F1B J3E F1B J3E F1B Specifications Overall distortion and noise Conducted spurious emission Clarifier variable range Antenna impedance Line output

DSC Watch Keeping Receiver Reception frequency Receiving system 1st IF 2nd IF Frequency stability Sensitivity Passband Spurious response Blocking/Desensitization Conducted spurious emission Antenna impedance

DSC Modem Modulation rate Modulation method Mark frequency (Y) Space frequency (B) DSC Protocol DSC operation standards DSC code Message storage

NBDP Modem Modulation rate Modulation method Mark frequency (Y) Space frequency (B) NBDP Protocol NBDP code When an input signal level of 30 uV is applied, the ratio between low-frequency output 1000 Hz and unwanted components contained in that output is 30 dB or more. Power emitted from antenna terminal is 2 nW or less (9kHz

- 2GHz) and 20 nW or less (2GHz - 4GHz). 200 Hz (1 Hz steps) 50 unbalanced 0 dBm 600 (balanced) Distress and safety frequencies of 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz, and additionally on one or more of the 4207.5 kHz/

6312.0 kHz/ 12577.0 kHz/ 16804.5 kHz Double superheterodyne 40.04025 MHz 40.25 kHz Within 10 Hz 1% or lower symbol error rate at reception input voltage of 1V 6 dB bandwidth 30 dB bandwidth 60 dB bandwidth Symbol error rate of 1% or better when an unwanted signal level of 31.6 mV is applied to a wanted signal level of 10 uv from an intermediate frequency separated by 750 Hz or more through to a frequency 3x the test frequency Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted signal level of 10 uV and an unwanted signal level of 1 mV separated by 500 Hz Power emitted from antenna terminal is 2 nW or less. 50 unbalanced

: 270 - 300 Hz

: Within 380 Hz

: Within 550 Hz Within 100 baud 30 10-6 FSK (sub-carrier: 1700 Hz) Transmission

: Within 1615 Hz 0.5 Hz Reception (permissible value) : Within 1615 Hz 20 Hz Transmission

: Within 1785 Hz 0.5 Hz Reception (permissible value) : Within 1785 Hz 20 Hz ITU-R recommendation M.493-13 (Class A and B) ITU-R recommendation M.541-9, M.821-1 10-bit error detecting code 20 Rx distress, 20 Rx others, 20 Tx messages Within 100baud 30 10-6 FSK sub-carrier 1700Hz Transmission

: Within 1615 Hz 0.5 Hz Reception (permissible value) : Within 1615 Hz 20 Hz Transmission

: Within 1785 Hz 0.5 Hz Reception (permissible value) : Within 1785 Hz 20 Hz ITU-R recommendation M.476-5,M.491-1,M.492-6,M.625-4 ITU-T recommendation F.1, F.130, S.6 7-bit error detecting code 9-3 1605.0 - 27500.0 kHz 1605.0 - 3999.9 kHz 4000.0 - 27500.0 kHz 2:1 or less Preset or auto-tuning Preset tuning: 0.5 seconds, auto-tuning: max. 45 seconds 24 VDC (21.6 VDC to 24.7 VDC)

/ 500Wpep

/ 700Wpep 250Wpep 300Wpep 57.6 kbps RS-485 and RS-232C, and Centronics compliant 150 balanced

-54 dBm Internal loud speaker (8) External speaker impedance : 8 or more Handset phone (150) 3.8 inch FSTN monochrome, 320 x 240 dot, LED backlight

: Rated 1mW or more

: 5W max 4.8kbps RS-232C USB 2.0, FAT16/32 file format PS/2 Centronics compliant 10.4 inch TFT color, 640x480 dots, CCFL backlight Standard brightness 450cd/m2, Viewing angle 160 /140 Contrast 600 1 Serial two wire interactive transmission Mini DIN 5Pin 20,000,000 times Serial impact dot matrix Centronics compliant ANK FX850 mode IBM Proprinter II mode Roll paper holder 209 - 216 mm (8.23 - 8.50") roll paper ANK FX850 mode IBM Proprinter II mode Manual (non-stepped) 10.2 VDC - 31.2 VDC Maximum 35 W 324 characters 264 characters 21 kbytes 9.3 kbytes Specifications

Antenna tuner Frequency range Maximum input power

(JSS-2250/ 2500) SWR after tuning Tuning method Tuning time Power supply

MF/HF controller Communication speed Communication interface Microphone input impedance Standard modulation input Audio output LCD display

Data terminal Communication speed Communication interface USB interface Keyboard interface Printer interface LCD display Keyboard Communication interface Connector Durability Printer (NKG-800/NKG-900) Printing system Communication interface Supported fonts Paper feed system Paper type Buffer size Density adjustment Power supply voltage Power consumption 9-4 9.2 Options

(1) Battery charger (NBB-714) Source voltage Current consumption Charging current Charging circuit/ characteristic Functions Alarm type Temperature range for full performance Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Humidity resistance Vibration resistance (3 axes)

(2) Battery charger (NBB-724) Source voltage Current consumption Charging current Charging circuit/ characteristic Functions Alarm type Temperature range for full performance Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Humidity resistance Vibration resistance (3 axes) Specifications 90 VAC to 132 VAC or 180 VAC to 264 VAC (50/60 Hz) Charging

: 8 A or less (100 VAC input) 4 A or less (220 VAC input)

: 0.3 A or less (at 24 VDC ope) Discharging Maximum 10 A Floating charge 16 VDC or more: Constant voltage or current characteristic Less than 16 VDC: Reduced current characteristic*

(*) Foldback current limiting characteristic Overvoltage input protection, Reverse polarity protection, Dimmer lamp, Alarm mute with remote control Batt low/high voltage, Internal temperature, AC fail, Other abnormal charging

-15C - +55C

-15C - +55C

-25C - +65C No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40C, 93% RH

: Full amplitude 1 mm10%

2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz:

: Maximum 13.2 Hz to 100 Hz:

m/s2 fixed acceleration No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz for more than 2 hours 7 90 VAC to 132 VAC or 180 VAC to 264 VAC (50/60 Hz) Charging

: 15 A or less (100 VAC input) 8 A or less (220 VAC input)

: 0.5 A or less (at 24 VDC ope) Discharging Maximum 22 A (Common to Floating & Equalizing charge) Floating charge and equalizing charge 18 VDC or more: Constant voltage or current characteristic Less than 18 VDC: Reduced current characteristic*

(*) Foldback current limiting characteristic Overvoltage input protection, Reverse polarity protection, Dimmer lamp, Float/Equal changing, DC ope, Batt temp Batt low/high voltage, Internal temperature, Other abnormal charging

-15C - +55C

-15C - +55C

-25C - +65C No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40C, 93% RH 2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz:

: Full amplitude 1 mm10%

: Maximum 13.2 Hz to 100 Hz:

m/s2 fixed acceleration No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz for more than 2 hours 7 9-5 Specifications

(3) Printer (NKG-91) Printing system Communication interface Data control Data buffer Maximum print speed Roll paper width Power supply voltage Current consumption

(4) Printer (DPU-414) Printing system Communication interface Data control Data buffer Maximum print speed Roll paper width Power voltage Current consumption Thermal line dot RS-232C, 4.8/9.6/38.4 kbps RTS/CTS 4096 byte 20 mm/sec or more 58 mm 6.5 VDC (5 VDC to 8.7 VDC) Maximum 2 A Thermal serial dot RS-232C, 4.8k/9.6k/38.4 kbps HW busy About 28 Kbyte 52.5 cps 112 mm 6.5 VDC Maximum 2 A 9-6 Specifications 9.3 Peripheral interfaces

(1) GPS or other navigation aid interface Interface standard NMEA0183/ IEC61162-1 Ed.4 (2010-11) compliant 4800 bps, start 1 bit, data 8 bit, stop 1 bit Non parity NMEA0183 V1.5:

V2.0:

V2.3:

(Talker = "GP" or other) GGA/ GLL/ RMC GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ ZDA GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ GNS/ ZDA Ship position & time information: GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC Date information:

Equipment time information:

ZDA/ RMC ZDA/ GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC Protocol Input sentence Data type

(1.1) Electrical description GPS_RX-A GPS_RX-B CQD-2417 TERMINAL BOARD TB204 26 27 CMC-2425/2450 PA CONTROL UNIT CMN-2250 TRX UNIT CMJ-2250 WKR MODEM UNIT J202 J102 J172 J1111 J1131 W30 W13 W14 J502 1 2 TR501 TR502 R541 R542 R543 R544 R541, R543: 270 R542, R544: 10k

+3.3V R540 3.3k CD503 PHT501 Load requirements Current consumption 2mA at 2V or less Maximum input voltage 15V or more Recommended operating current 2mA or more 9-7 Specifications

(1.2) List of sentences and associated data fields

(1.2.1) GGA Global positioning system (GPS) fix data

$--GGA, hhmmss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x, xx, x.x, x.x, M, x.x, M, x.x, xxxx *hh<CR><LF>

Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023 Age of differential GPS data Units of geoidal separation, m Geoidal separation Units of antenna altitude, m Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level

(geoid) Horizontal dilution of precision Number of satellites in use, 00-12, may be different from the number in view GPS quality indicator Longitude E/W Latitude N/S UTC of position

(1.2.2) GLL Geographic position Latitude/longitude

$--GLL, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, hhmmss.ss, A, a *hh<CR><LF>

Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous, D = Differential, E = Estimated M = Manual input, S = Simulator, N = Data not valid Status: A= data valid, V= data invalid UTC of position Longitude, E/W Latitude, N/S 9-8

(1.2.3) RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

$--RMC, hhmmss.ss, A, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, xxxxxx, x.x, a, a, a *hh<CR><LF>

Specifications Navigational status Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous, D = Differential, E = Estimated, F = Float RTK, M = Manual input, N = Data not valid P = Precise, R = Real Time Kinematic S = Simulator, Magnetic variation, degrees, E/W Date: dd/mm/yy Course over ground, degrees true Speed over ground, knots Longitude, E/W Latitude, N/S Status: A = data valid, V = navigation receiver warning UTC of position fix

(1.2.4) GNS GNSS fix data

$--GNS, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, c---c, xx, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, a *hh<CR><LF>

Navigational status Differential reference station ID Age of differential data Geoidal separation, m Antenna altitude, m, re: mean-sea-level

(geoid) HDOP Total number of satellites in use, 00-99 Mode indicator:

N = No fix, A = Autonomous, D = Differential, P = Precise, R = Real Time Kinematic, F = Float RTK, E = Estimated, M = Manual input, S = Simulator Longitude, E/W Latitude, N/S UTC of position 9-9 Specifications

(1.2.5) ZDA Time and date

$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss, xx, xx, xxxx, xx, xx *hh<CR><LF>

Local zone minutes, 00 to +59 Local zone hours, 00 h to 13 h Year (UTC) Month, 01 to 12 (UTC) Day, 01 to 31 (UTC) UTC IEC61162-1 compliant 4800 bps, start 1 bit, data 8 bit, stop 1 bit Non parity IEC61162-1 compliant proprietary sentence

$PJRCL sentence (for RMS log saving)

$PJRCM sentence

(Device ID = "CT") Model number, serial number, self-diagnosis information, etc.

(2) RMS interface Interface standard Protocol Output message Data type 9-10 10. OPTIONS OPERATION Options Operation 10.1 Battery charger (NBB-714) CAUTION When replacing fuses, always use fuses of the same type. 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 2 5 8 1. 10A fuse AC mains fuses (2pcs) 2. AC switch Turns on the AC mains power supply. 3. BATT LOW/HIGH lamp This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate low voltage of the battery (approx. 21.5V). And also turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate overvoltage of the battery

(approx. 32.2 ~ 37.0V) and then, turns off the BATT breaker. 4. AC FAIL/ CHG ALARM This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate any one of the following alarms. While the BATT breaker is ON, the AC switch is OFF or any AC fails such as the power failure or the blowout of fuses. While the AC switch is ON, the BATT breaker is OFF. Over discharge detection (16V or less) Note) If AC input is ON, charging is available without tripping the breaker. Overheat detection (+80C) 5. Current meter Indicates the charge current (+) or discharge current (-). 6. ALM MUTE switch Silences the active alarm buzzer sound. 7. Alarm buzzer 8. Voltage meter Indicates the output voltage of the battery. 9. Dimmer control Adjusts the dimmer level of alarm lamps. Note) Unable to turn off completely. 10. BATT breaker When turned on, connects the internal circuit to the battery, and after that turning on the AC breaker enables charging of the battery. Note that if detected over discharge of the battery (approx. 19.5V), this breaker trips automatically. 10-1 Options Operation Procedure Turn on the AC switch and the BATT breaker to start charging the battery.

The AC FAIL/CHG ALARM is activated if the AC switch and BATT breaker are turned ON at different timing. However it is due to the notification function of the switch/breaker ON/OFF state and is NOT the alarm for any malfunction.

The NBB-714 is a battery charger for the maintenance free battery only, i.e. the charging type is floating only and not providing the equalizing charge. Replacing fuses To replace fuses, turn off the AC switch and the BATT breaker first, and then unscrew the both two fuse cases as shown below to replace them. Note) The appearance of the blowout fuses look like normal. So when checking if the fuses are blown or not, always use the tester. Note The battery can be used as a secondary power source when the BATT breaker is ON while the AC breaker is OFF. However in this case, be sure not to cause over discharge condition. When any alarm is occurred, treat it as follows. then, after the AC switch. And

- BATT LOW

- BATT HIGH When the battery overvoltage (32.2~37.0V) is detected, trips the BATT breaker. In this case, turn off the voltage is recovered to normal, turn on the AC switch and the BATT breaker. Note) In this case, the charge alarm is also detected due to the BATT breaker trip and the CHG ALARM is activated. Carry on charging. This alarm is cleared automatically after the battery voltage increases to approx. 23.5V.

- Turn on the AC input/switch.

- After checking that the battery voltage is not overvoltage, turn on the BATT breaker.

- If the battery is over discharge condition (16V), turn on both the AC switch and the BATT breaker to charge the battery. The built-in charging circuit is disconnected until the temperature returns to the normal condition

(60 or lower) automatically

- AC FAIL/CHG ALARM

- High temperature 10-2 Options Operation 10.2 Battery charger (NBB-724) CAUTION The batteries, except that require no equalization, should be carried out the equalizing charge at least every six months lead-acid batteries for sealed 4 6 1 2 3 5 7 8 9 10 1. AC breaker When turned on, enables to use the AC mains input. 2. BATT breaker When turned on, connects the internal circuit to the battery, and after that turning on the AC breaker enables charging of the battery. Note that if detected over discharge of the battery (approx. 19.5V), this breaker trips automatically. 3. BATT LOW alarm lamp This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate low voltage of the battery (approx. 21.5V). 4. CHG alarm lamp This lamp turns on (or blinks*) and the buzzer sounds to indicate any one of the following alarms. The BATT breaker is OFF while the AC breaker is ON. Over voltage (equalizing charge voltage + 1.0V) High temperature of the charging circuit (+75 ) *

5. FLOAT charge lamp This lamp turns on during the floating charge operation. 6. EQUAL charge lamp This lamp turns on during the equalizing charge operation. 7. CHARGE mode switch Changes the charge mode between floating and equalizing charge. 8. Dimmer control Adjusts the dimmer level. 9. Current meter Indicates the charge current (+) or discharge current (-). 10. Voltage meter Indicates the output voltage of the battery. 10-3 Options Operation

(1) Charging a battery in the floating mode Procedure Turn on the AC and BATT breakers.

FLOAT lamp turns on during the floating charge operation.

When turning on the AC breaker prior to BATT breaker, CHG alarm lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds. But this is not malfunction as mentioned above.

(2) Charging a battery in the equalizing mode Procedure 111 ... Turn on the AC and BATT breakers. Make sure FLOAT lamp is turned on and the battery charge is started in the floating mode. 222 ... Press the CHARGE mode switch.

The lighting lamp is changed from FLOAT to EQUAL to indicate operating in the equalizing mode.

The charging mode can be switched between FLOAT and EQUAL alternately. 333 ... When the equalizing charge is completed, returns to the floating mode automatically. The equalizing charge is continued until the charge current goes down to approx. 3.0A or until 10 hours elapse. Note The battery can be used as a secondary power source when the BATT breaker is ON while the AC breaker is OFF. However in this case, be sure not to cause over discharge condition. When any alarm is occurred, treat it as follows.

- BATT LOW Carry on charging. This alarm is cleared automatically after the battery voltage increases to approx. 23.5V.

- BATT breaker OFF Turn the BATT breaker on.

- Over voltage Turn off the AC and BATT breakers until the battery voltage returns to the normal condition.

- High temperature The built-in charging circuit is disconnected until the temperature returns to the normal condition (60 or lower) automatically

- Over discharge When the BATT breaker trips, turn on the breakers in the order of AC and BATT so that the charge operation is restarted. 10-4 Options Operation 10.3 Printer (NKG-91) CAUTION The thermal head of the NKG-91 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not touch the thermal head of the printer. Make sure that the thermal head is cool before replacing the paper or cleaning the thermal head. The paper used in the NKG-91 printer is heat sensitive. Take the following precautions when using this paper. Store the paper away from heat, humidity, or heat sources. Do not rub the paper with any hard objects. Do not place the paper near organic solvents. Do not allow the paper to come in contact with polyvinyl chloride film, erasers, or adhesive tape for long periods of time. Keep the paper away from freshly copied diazo type or wet process copy paper. 1. Paper cover open button 2. Paper cutter 3. Paper cover 3 1 2 Loading the printer paper 111 ... Press the paper cover open button. The paper cover will open. 222 ... Insert the paper as shown in the diagram at right. Position the paper such that the leading edge extends outside the printer, and press both sides of the paper cover to close it. Note The printer will be turned on and off simultaneously with the equipment. 10-5 Options Operation 10.4 Printer (NKG-800) CAUTION The print head of the NKG-800 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not touch the print head of the printer. Make sure that the print head is cool before replacing the paper or cleaning the print head. Do not use the NKG-800 printer if there is no ink ribbon cartridge or paper. Do not twist the ink ribbon when installing the ink ribbon cartridge. Before opening and closing the cover of the NKG-800 printer, turn off the printer. Wait more than 2 seconds after turning the printer off before turning it back on again so it can initialize correctly. Roll paper cover Roll support cover Prevents printed roll paper from being wound back in. The following shows the functions of the operation panel. Print head Contacts the roll paper for printing. Operation panel Printer cover Power switch Platen Paper is fed in contact with this platen when the friction is pushed towards the back. lever Roll paper Roll paper stand Roll bar Passes through the printing roll paper. Roll paper cutter Paper feed knob Friction lever When replacing the roll paper, pull this lever towards the front before inserting the paper, and return it towards the back after paper is inserted. P.PARK Paper Park Rewinds the roll paper. FF Feed Form Feeds paper one page at a time. LF Line Feed Feeds the paper one line at a time. NLQ High-quality Printing Switches the printer to the high-quality printing mode. ONLINE Printer Ready Setting The printer is ready for printing when the lamp is lit. Note 1: Before performing P.PARK/FF/LF/NLQ, press ONLINE to set the printer offline (lamp out). Note 2: When the printer runs out of roll paper, the P.OUT lamp lights and the printer automatically goes offline. 10-6 Loading the printer paper 111 ... Turn the printer OFF, loosen the roll paper stand fixing screws, and slide the stand backwards to open the printer cover. At this step, also remove the roll paper cover. 222 ... Pass the roll bar through the roll paper, and install the roll paper onto the roll paper stand paying attention to its orientation. 333 ... Pass the roll paper over the guide bar as shown in the figure at right. 444 ... Pull the friction lever towards the front, and insert the leading edge of the paper into the rear of the platen. Then, return the friction lever to the back, and turn the paper feed knob to feed the paper out. 555 ... Lift the paper load lever up to hold down paper fed out of the platen. Options Operation Fixing screws Roll bar Roll paper Guide bar Platen Paper load lever 10-7 Options Operation 666 ... Return the roll paper cover to its original position, and place the roll support cover as shown in the figure at right. 777 ... Close the printer cover, return the roll paper stand to its original position, and tighten the fixing screws. Note To perform a print test, turn the printer on with the LF key held down. To end the print test, turn the printer off. Replacing the ink ribbon 111 ... Turn the printer on, and following the same procedure as that in the previous section, open the printer cover, lift up the ink ribbon cartridge by holding the projection on the cartridge, and lift the cartridge up to remove it. 222 ... Using the knob on the new cartridge to make the ribbon taut, manually move the print head to the left edge, and attach the ribbon so that it is between the ribbon mask and print head. 333 ... Close the printer cover, return the roll paper stand to its original position, and tighten the fixing screws. Roll support cover Roll paper cover Projection Ink ribbon cartridge Print head Knob Ink ribbon cartridge Note For other details, check the NKG-800 Installation Guide. The printer's operation mode can be set by the DIP switches. However, leave the DIP switch settings at their factory defaults (all off) when using the printer connected to the equipment. 10-8 Options Operation 10.5 Operations using a SELCALL unit The JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF radio equipment can be connected to external selective calling devices for fishing boats (Selcall) to send signals for calling Selcall buoys or Selcall receivers on ships. Note For details on operations of the Selcall device, refer to the manuals of that device. Procedure 111 ... Finish all menu operations to return the screen to the status display. When a transmission is made from the Selcall device while menus are displayed, menus can no longer be operated until transmission ends. 222 ... Set the communication mode to TEL and the assigned frequency (e.g. 2331.5 kHz) for transmitting on the Selcall device in the free frequency input mode. Then tune the antenna by pressing key. ANT TUNE In this case, input both the Rx and Tx frequencies as simplex frequencies. 333 ... Operate the Selcall device to start transmission. When transmission is started, the communications mode automatically changes to H2B as shown at right. 444 ... When transmission ends, the communications mode returns to the original mode. I D 4 3 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 : 5 9 ( U T C ) P o s 8 9 5 9 . 0 1 2 3 ' N 1 7 9 5 9 . 6 7 8 9 ' E @ 2 3 : 5 9 ( E X T ) TEL ITU- 401 4357.0 kHz 4065.0 RX kHz TX S I G W K R s c a n b a n d s :

2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 M H z N o n D S T : +

D R O B O S : +

E d t D S T : +

10-9 Options Operation 10-10 Appendix 11. Appendix This section lists frequencies used for DSC such as frequencies used for routine calls and frequencies used for safety and distress calls. It also lists the channel list of ITU frequencies built-in to this equipment and the instructions for operating the MF/HF radio equipment. 11.1 Frequencies for distress and safety calls The following is a list of international1 transmission frequencies (all simplex) used by coast and ship stations for distress and safety purposes either with DSC, radiotelephone or telex. CH No. indicates channel numbers preprogrammed to this equipment. DSC CH No. TRx kHz 2187.5 4207.5 6312.0 8414.5 12577.0 16804.5

---

401 601 801 1201 1601 radiotelephone CH No.

---

---

---

833

---

---

TRx kHz 2182.0 4125.0 6215.0 8291.0 12290.0 16420.0 telex CH No.

---

411 611 801 1287 1624 TRx kHz 2174.5 4177.5 6268.0 8376.5 12520.0 16695.0 Note

- When making DSC calls, the frequencies above can only be used if the message category is Distress, Urgency, or Safety.

- The DSC frequencies listed above are watched by the DSC watch keeping receiver.

- The radiotelephone frequencies other than 8291.0 kHz are the same as the transmission frequencies of ITU channels 421, 606, 1221 and 1621. However, when making calls for distress and safety purposes, use these frequencies2 as simplex channels. 1 RR Appendix 15 2 RR Article 52.221.3 11-1 Appendix 11.2 National DSC frequencies for routine calls When ship and coast stations call national stations for purposes that are not safety or distress purposes, normally use the national frequencies allocated by the administrator prior to using the international frequencies listed later.3 The frequencies for Japan are as follows. Additionally, the pair frequencies are used to make a call to the coast station. Tx (kHz) 4180.5 6275.5 Rx (kHz) 2169.0 4218.0 6326.5 Tx (kHz) 8391.5 12521.0 16721.0 Rx (kHz) 8431.5 12623.0 16844.0 Tx (kHz) 18872.0 22318.0 25175.0 Rx (kHz) 19682.5 22410.0 26103.0 11.3 International DSC frequencies for routine calls The following international4 frequencies are used when calling ship and coast stations via DSC if the other station's nationality or the frequency they are watching is not know, except for safety or distress calls. CH No. indicates channel numbers preprogrammed to this equipment. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) 2177.0 CH No.

---

402 403 404 602 603 604 802 803 804 1202 1203 1204 2189.5 4208.0 4208.5 4209.0 6312.5 6313.0 6313.5 8415.0 8415.5 8416.0 12577.5 12578.0 12578.5 CH No. 1602 1603 1604 1801 1802 1803 2201 2202 2203 2501 2502 2503 Tx (kHz) 16805.0 16805.5 16806.0 18898.5 18899.0 18899.5 22374.5 22375.0 22375.5 25208.5 25209.0 25209.5 Rx (kHz) 16903.0 16903.5 16904.0 19703.5 19704.0 19704.5 22444.0 22444.5 22445.0 26121.0 26121.5 26122.0 4219.5 4220.0 4220.5 6331.0 6331.5 6332.0 8436.5 8437.0 8437.5 12657.0 12657.5 12658.0 Note

- The above frequencies can only be used when the DSC message category is Routine.

- The above table lists the sending and receiving frequencies (duplex) when a ship station calls a coast station.

- Normally routine calls between ship stations use 2177.0 kHz (simplex) as first choice frequency.

- Channels not listed in the table above (401/601/801/1201/1601) are the

-

frequencies listed earlier for distress and safety purposes. In the table above, channels 402/602/802/1202/1602/1801/2201/2501 should be selected first when making routine DSC calls on international frequencies.5 3 ITU-R M.541-9 Annex 3 4.1.2 4 RR Appendix 15 5 RR Appendix 17 part A footnote l 11-2 Appendix 11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX) This section lists the channels preprogrammed into this equipment as TEL, CW and TLX ITU frequencies.

(1) Radiotelephone mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17) CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 601 602 603 604 605 606 4065.0 4357.0 4068.0 4360.0 4071.0 4363.0 4074.0 4366.0 4077.0 4369.0 4080.0 4372.0 4083.0 4375.0 4086.0 4378.0 4089.0 4381.0 4092.0 4384.0 4095.0 4387.0 4098.0 4390.0 4101.0 4393.0 4104.0 4396.0 4107.0 4399.0 4110.0 4402.0 4113.0 4405.0 4116.0 4408.0 4119.0 4411.0 4122.0 4414.0 4125.0 4417.0 4128.0 4420.0

( *1) ( * 2) 4131.0 4423.0 4134.0 4426.0 4137.0 4429.0 4140.0 4432.0 4143.0 4146.0 4149.0 4435.0 4146.0 Simplex( *4) 4149.0 Simplex( *5) 6200.0 6501.0 6203.0 6504.0 6206.0 6507.0 6209.0 6510.0 6212.0 6513.0 6215.0 6516.0

( *1) ( * 2) 607 608 609 610 611 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 6218.0 6519.0 6221.0 6224.0 6227.0 6230.0 6522.0 6224.0 Simplex( *3) 6227.0 Simplex( *3) 6230.0 Simplex ( *3) 8195.0 8719.0 8198.0 8722.0 8201.0 8725.0 8204.0 8728.0 8207.0 8731.0 8210.0 8734.0 8213.0 8737.0 8216.0 8740.0 8219.0 8743.0 8222.0 8746.0 8225.0 8749.0 8228.0 8752.0 8231.0 8755.0 8234.0 8758.0 8237.0 8761.0 8240.0 8764.0 8243.0 8767.0 8246.0 8770.0 8249.0 8773.0 8252.0 8776.0 8255.0 8779.0 8258.0 8782.0

( *2) 8261.0 8785.0 8264.0 8788.0 8267.0 8791.0 8270.0 8794.0 8273.0 8797.0 8276.0 8800.0 8279.0 8803.0 8282.0 8806.0 11-3 Appendix CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks 8285.0 8809.0 8288.0 8291.0 8294.0 8297.0 8812.0 8291.0 Simplex( *1) 8294.0 Simplex( *6) 8297.0 Simplex( *7) 12230.0 13077.0 12233.0 13080.0 12236.0 13083.0 12239.0 13086.0 12242.0 13089.0 12245.0 13092.0 12248.0 13095.0 12251.0 13098.0 12254.0 13101.0 12257.0 13104.0 12260.0 13107.0 12263.0 13110.0 12266.0 13113.0 12269.0 13116.0 12272.0 13119.0 12275.0 13122.0 12278.0 13125.0 12281.0 13128.0 12284.0 13131.0 12287.0 13134.0 12290.0 13137.0 12293.0 13140.0 12296.0 13143.0 12299.0 13146.0 12302.0 13149.0 12305.0 13152.0 12308.0 13155.0 12311.0 13158.0 12314.0 13161.0 12317.0 13164.0 12320.0 13167.0 12323.0 13170.0 12326.0 13173.0 12329.0 13176.0 12332.0 13179.0 12335.0 13182.0 12338.0 13185.0 12341.0 13188.0

( *1) ( *8) 831 832 833 834 835 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 11-4 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 12344.0 13191.0 12347.0 13194.0 12350.0 13197.0 12353.0 12353.0 Simplex( *3) 12356.0 12356.0 Simplex( *3) 12359.0 12359.0 Simplex( *2) 12362.0 12362.0 Simplex( *3) 12365.0 12365.0 Simplex( *3) 16360.0 17242.0 16363.0 17245.0 16366.0 17248.0 16369.0 17251.0 16372.0 17254.0 16375.0 17257.0 16378.0 17260.0 16381.0 17263.0 16384.0 17266.0 16387.0 17269.0 16390.0 17272.0 16393.0 17275.0 16396.0 17278.0 16399.0 17281.0 16402.0 17284.0 16405.0 17287.0 16408.0 17290.0 16411.0 17293.0 16414.0 17296.0 16417.0 17299.0 16420.0 17302.0 16423.0 17305.0 16426.0 17308.0 16429.0 17311.0 16432.0 17314.0 16435.0 17317.0 16438.0 17320.0 16441.0 17323.0 16444.0 17326.0 16447.0 17329.0 16450.0 17332.0 16453.0 17335.0 16456.0 17338.0 16459.0 17341.0 16462.0 17344.0

( *1) ( * 9) CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks CH No. 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 16465.0 17347.0 16468.0 17350.0 16471.0 17353.0 16474.0 17356.0 16477.0 17359.0 16480.0 17362.0 16483.0 17365.0 16486.0 17368.0 16489.0 17371.0 16492.0 17374.0 16495.0 17377.0 16498.0 17380.0 16501.0 17383.0 16504.0 17386.0 16507.0 17389.0 16510.0 17392.0 16513.0 17395.0 16516.0 17398.0 16519.0 17401.0 16522.0 17404.0 16525.0 17407.0 16528.0 16528.0 Simplex( *3) 16531.0 16531.0 Simplex( *3) 16534.0 16534.0 Simplex( *3) 16537.0 16537.0 Simplex( *2) 16540.0 16540.0 Simplex( *3) 16543.0 16543.0 Simplex( *3) 16546.0 16546.0 Simplex( *3) 18780.0 19755.0 18783.0 19758.0 18786.0 19761.0 18789.0 19764.0 18792.0 19767.0 18795.0 19770.0 18798.0 19773.0

( *2) 18801.0 19776.0 18804.0 19779.0 18807.0 19782.0 18810.0 19785.0 18813.0 19788.0 18816.0 19791.0 18819.0 19794.0 18822.0 19797.0 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 Appendix Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks 18825.0 18825.0 Simplex( *3) 18828.0 18828.0 Simplex( *3) 18831.0 18831.0 Simplex( *3) 18834.0 18834.0 Simplex( *3) 18837.0 18837.0 Simplex( *3) 18840.0 18840.0 Simplex( *3) 18843.0 18843.0 Simplex( *3) 22000.0 22696.0 22003.0 22699.0 22006.0 22702.0 22009.0 22705.0 22012.0 22708.0 22015.0 22711.0 22018.0 22714.0 22021.0 22717.0 22024.0 22720.0 22027.0 22723.0 22030.0 22726.0 22033.0 22729.0 22036.0 22732.0 22039.0 22735.0 22042.0 22738.0 22045.0 22741.0 22048.0 22744.0 22051.0 22747.0 22054.0 22750.0 22057.0 22753.0 22060.0 22756.0 22063.0 22759.0

( *2) 22066.0 22762.0 22069.0 22765.0 22072.0 22768.0 22075.0 22771.0 22078.0 22774.0 22081.0 22777.0 22084.0 22780.0 22087.0 22783.0 22090.0 22786.0 22093.0 22789.0 22096.0 22792.0 22099.0 22795.0 22102.0 22798.0 22105.0 22801.0 11-5 Appendix CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks 22108.0 22804.0 22111.0 22807.0 22114.0 22810.0 22117.0 22813.0 22120.0 22816.0 22123.0 22819.0 22126.0 22822.0 22129.0 22825.0 22132.0 22828.0 22135.0 22831.0 22138.0 22834.0 22141.0 22837.0 22144.0 22840.0 22147.0 22843.0 22150.0 22846.0 22153.0 22849.0 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 22156.0 22852.0 22159.0 22159.0 Simplex( *3) 22162.0 22162.0 Simplex( *3) 22165.0 22165.0 Simplex( *3) 22168.0 22168.0 Simplex( *3) CH No. 2258 2259 2260 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks 22171.0 22171.0 Simplex( *3) 22174.0 22174.0 Simplex( *3) 22177.0 22177.0 Simplex( *3) 25070.0 26145.0 25073.0 26148.0 25076.0 26151.0 25079.0 26154.0 25082.0 26157.0 25085.0 26160.0 25088.0 26163.0 25091.0 26166.0 25094.0 26169.0

( *2) 25097.0 26172.0 25100.0 25100.0 Simplex( *3) 25103.0 25103.0 Simplex( *3) 25106.0 25106.0 Simplex( *3) 25109.0 25109.0 Simplex( *3) 25112.0 25112.0 Simplex( *3) 25115.0 25115.0 Simplex( *3) 25118.0 25118.0 Simplex( *3) 2257

*1) Used for distress and safety purposes (operates duplex channel as simplex). 2517

*2) For calling.

*3) For inter-ship communications.

*4) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 4351.0 kHz.

*5) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 4354.0 kHz.

*6) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 8707.0 kHz.

*7) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 8710.0 kHz.

*8) From January 2004, calling on channel 1221 is prohibited.

*9) From January 2004, calling on channel 1621 is prohibited. 11-6

(2) Additional usable frequencies in TEL mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17 / Sub Section C-1/ C-2) Appendix Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks 4000.0 4000.0 Simplex 4003.0 4003.0 Simplex 4006.0 4006.0 Simplex 4009.0 4009.0 Simplex 4012.0 4012.0 Simplex 4015.0 4015.0 Simplex 4018.0 4018.0 Simplex 4021.0 4021.0 Simplex 4024.0 4024.0 Simplex 4027.0 4027.0 Simplex 4030.0 4030.0 Simplex 4033.0 4033.0 Simplex 4036.0 4036.0 Simplex 4039.0 4039.0 Simplex 4042.0 4042.0 Simplex 4045.0 4045.0 Simplex 4048.0 4048.0 Simplex 4051.0 4051.0 Simplex 4054.0 4054.0 Simplex 4057.0 4057.0 Simplex 4060.0 4060.0 Simplex 8101.0 8101.0 Simplex 8104.0 8104.0 Simplex 8107.0 8107.0 Simplex 8110.0 8110.0 Simplex 8113.0 8113.0 Simplex Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks 8116.0 81160. Simplex 8119.0 8119.0 Simplex 8122.0 8122.0 Simplex 8125.0 8125.0 Simplex 8128.0 8128.0 Simplex 8131.0 8131.0 Simplex 8134.0 8134.0 Simplex 8137.0 8137.0 Simplex 8140.0 8140.0 Simplex 8143.0 8143.0 Simplex 8146.0 8146.0 Simplex 8149.0 8149.0 Simplex 8152.0 8152.0 Simplex 8155.0 8155.0 Simplex 8158.0 8158.0 Simplex 8161.0 8161.0 Simplex 8164.0 8164.0 Simplex 8167.0 8167.0 Simplex 8170.0 8170.0 Simplex 8173.0 8173.0 Simplex 8176.0 8176.0 Simplex 8179.0 8179.0 Simplex 8182.0 8182.0 Simplex 8185.0 8185.0 Simplex 8188.0 8188.0 Simplex 8191.0 8191.0 Simplex 11-7 Appendix

(3) CW mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17) TRx (kHz) Remarks 4182.0 Calling 4182.5 Calling 4184.0 Calling 4184.5 Calling 4183.0 Calling 4183.5 Calling 4185.0 Calling 4185.5 Calling 4186.0 Calling 4186.5 4187.0 4187.5 4188.0 4188.5 4189.0 4189.5 4190.0 4190.5 4191.0 4191.5 4192.0 4192.5 4193.0 4193.5 4194.0 4194.5 4195.0 4195.5 4196.0 4196.5 4197.0 4197.5 4198.0 4198.5 4199.0 4199.5 4200.0 4200.5 4201.0 4201.5 4202.0 6277.0 Calling 6277.5 Calling 6276.0 Calling 6276.5 Calling CH No. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 601 602 603 604 11-8 CH No. 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 TRx (kHz) Remarks 6278.0 Calling 6278.5 Calling 6279.0 Calling 6279.5 Calling 6280.0 Calling 6280.5 Calling 6285.0 6285.5 6286.0 6286.5 6287.0 6287.5 6288.0 6288.5 6289.0 6289.5 6290.0 6290.5 6291.0 6291.5 6292.0 6292.5 6293.0 6293.5 6294.0 6294.5 6295.0 6295.5 6296.0 6296.5 6297.0 6297.5 6298.0 6298.5 6299.0 6299.5 6300.0 8366.0 Calling 8366.5 Calling 8368.0 Calling 8369.0 Calling 8367.0 Calling 8367.5 Calling 8368.5 Calling 8369.5 Calling CH No. 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 TRx (kHz) Remarks 8370.0 Calling 8370.5 Calling 8342.0 8342.5 8343.0 8343.5 8344.0 8344.5 8345.0 8345.5 8346.0 8346.5 8347.0 8347.5 8348.0 8348.5 8349.0 8349.5 8350.0 8350.5 8351.0 8351.5 8352.0 8352.5 8353.0 8353.5 8354.0 8354.5 8355.0 8355.5 8356.0 8356.5 8357.0 8357.5 8358.0 8358.5 8359.0 8359.5 8360.0 8360.5 8361.0 8361.5 8362.0 8362.5 8363.0 8363.5 CH No. 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 TRx (kHz) Remarks 8364.0 8364.5 8365.0 8365.5 8371.0 8371.5 8372.0 8372.5 8373.0 8373.5 8374.0 8374.5 8375.0 8375.5 8376.0 12550.0 Calling 12550.5 Calling 12552.0 Calling 12553.5 Calling 12551.0 Calling 12551.5 Calling 12552.5 Calling 12553.0 Calling 12554.0 Calling 12554.5 Calling 12422.0 12422.5 12423.0 12423.5 12424.0 12424.5 12425.0 12425.5 12426.0 12426.5 12427.0 12427.5 12428.0 12428.5 12429.0 12429.5 12430.0 12430.5 12431.0 12431.5 12432.0 CH No. 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 TRx (kHz) Remarks 12432.5 12433.0 12433.5 12434.0 12434.5 12435.0 12435.5 12436.0 12436.5 12437.0 12437.5 12438.0 12438.5 12439.0 12439.5 12440.0 12440.5 12441.0 12441.5 12442.0 12442.5 12443.0 12443.5 12444.0 12444.5 12445.0 12445.5 12446.0 12446.5 12447.0 12447.5 12448.0 12448.5 12449.0 12449.5 12450.0 12450.5 12451.0 12451.5 12452.0 12452.5 12453.0 12453.5 12454.0 12454.5 12455.0 12455.5 CH No. 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 12100 12101 12102 12103 12104 12105 12106 12107 12108 12109 12110 12111 12112 12113 12114 12115 12116 12117 12118 12119 12120 1601 1602 1603 1604 Appendix TRx (kHz) Remarks 12456.0 12456.5 12457.0 12457.5 12458.0 12458.5 12459.0 12459.5 12460.0 12460.5 12461.0 12461.5 12462.0 12462.5 12463.0 12463.5 12464.0 12464.5 12465.0 12465.5 12466.0 12466.5 12467.0 12467.5 12468.0 12468.5 12469.0 12469.5 12470.0 12470.5 12471.0 12471.5 12472.0 12472.5 12473.0 12473.5 12474.0 12474.5 12475.0 12475.5 12476.0 12476.5 16734.0 Calling 16734.5 Calling 16736.0 Calling 16738.0 Calling 11-9 Appendix TRx (kHz) Remarks 16735.0 Calling 16735.5 Calling 16736.5 Calling 16737.0 Calling 16737.5 Calling 16738.5 Calling 16619.0 16619.5 16620.0 16620.5 16621.0 16621.5 16622.0 16622.5 16623.0 16623.5 16624.0 16624.5 16625.0 16625.5 16626.0 16626.5 16627.0 16627.5 16628.0 16628.5 16629.0 16629.5 16630.0 16630.5 16631.0 16631.5 16632.0 16632.5 16633.0 16633.5 16634.0 16634.5 16635.0 16635.5 16636.0 16636.5 16637.0 16637.5 16638.0 16638.5 16639.0 CH No. 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 11-10 CH No. 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 TRx (kHz) Remarks 16639.5 16640.0 16640.5 16641.0 16641.5 16642.0 16642.5 16643.0 16643.5 16644.0 16644.5 16645.0 16645.5 16646.0 16646.5 16647.0 16647.5 16648.0 16648.5 16649.0 16649.5 16650.0 16650.5 16651.0 16651.5 16652.0 16652.5 16653.0 16653.5 16654.0 16654.5 16655.0 16655.5 16656.0 16656.5 16657.0 16657.5 16658.0 16658.5 16659.0 16659.5 16660.0 16660.5 16661.0 16661.5 16662.0 16662.5 CH No. 1699 16100 16101 16102 16103 16104 16105 16106 16107 16108 16109 16110 16111 16112 16113 16114 16115 16116 16117 16118 16119 16120 16121 16122 16123 16124 16125 16126 16127 16128 16129 16130 16131 16132 16133 16134 16135 16136 16137 16138 16139 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 TRx (kHz) Remarks 16663.0 16663.5 16664.0 16664.5 16665.0 16665.5 16666.0 16666.5 16667.0 16667.5 16668.0 16668.5 16669.0 16669.5 16670.0 16670.5 16671.0 16671.5 16672.0 16672.5 16673.0 16673.5 16674.0 16674.5 16675.0 16675.5 16676.0 16676.5 16677.0 16677.5 16678.0 16678.5 16679.0 16679.5 16680.0 16680.5 16681.0 16681.5 16682.0 16682.5 16683.0 22279.5 Calling 22280.0 Calling 22280.5 Calling 22281.0 Calling 22281.5 Calling TRx (kHz) Remarks 22282.0 Calling 22282.5 Calling 22283.0 Calling 22283.5 Calling 22284.0 Calling 22242.0 22242.5 22243.0 22243.5 22244.0 22244.5 22245.0 22245.5 22246.0 22246.5 22247.0 22247.5 22248.0 22248.5 22249.0 22249.5 22250.0 22250.5 22251.0 22251.5 22252.0 22252.5 22253.0 22253.5 22254.0 22254.5 22255.0 22255.5 22256.0 22256.5 CH No. 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 CH No. 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 TRx (kHz) Remarks 22257.0 22257.5 22258.0 22258.5 22259.0 22259.5 22260.0 22260.5 22261.0 22261.5 22262.0 22262.5 22263.0 22263.5 22264.0 22264.5 22265.0 22265.5 22266.0 22266.5 22267.0 22267.5 22268.0 22268.5 22269.0 22269.5 22270.0 22270.5 22271.0 22271.5 22272.0 22272.5 22273.0 22273.5 22274.0 CH No. 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 Appendix TRx (kHz) Remarks 22274.5 22275.0 22275.5 22276.0 22276.5 22277.0 22277.5 22278.0 22278.5 22279.0 25171.5 Calling 25172.0 Calling 25171.5 Calling 25172.5 Calling 25161.5 25162.0 25162.5 25163.0 25163.5 25164.0 25164.5 25165.0 25165.5 25166.0 25166.5 25167.0 25167.5 25168.0 25168.5 25169.0 25169.5 25170.0 25170.5 25171.0 11-11 Appendix

(4) Telex mode ITU-RR Appendix 17 CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks 4172.5 4210.5 4173.0 4211.0 4173.5 4211.5 4174.0 4212.0 4174.5 4212.5 4175.0 4213.0 4175.5 4213.5 4176.0 4214.0 4176.5 4214.5 4177.0 4215.0 4177.5 4177.5 Simplex ( *1) 4178.0 4215.5 4178.5 4216.0 4179.0 4216.5 4179.5 4217.0 4180.0 4217.5 4180.5 4218.0 4181.0 4218.5 4181.5 4219.0 4202.5 4202.5 Simplex 4203.0 4203.0 Simplex 4203.5 4203.5 Simplex 4204.0 4204.0 Simplex 4204.5 4204.5 Simplex 4205.0 4205.0 Simplex 4205.5 4205.5 Simplex 4206.0 4206.0 Simplex 4206.5 4206.5 Simplex 4207.0 4207.0 Simplex 6263.0 6314.5 6263.5 6315.0 6264.0 6315.5 6264.5 6316.0 6265.0 6316.5 6265.5 6317.0 6266.0 6317.5 6266.5 6318.0 6267.0 6318.5 6267.5 6319.0 6268.0 6268.0 Simplex ( *1) 6268.5 6319.5 6269.0 6320.0 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 11-12 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 6269.5 6320.5 6270.0 6321.0 6270.5 6321.5 6271.0 6322.0 6271.5 6322.5 6272.0 6323.0 6272.5 6323.5 6273.0 6324.0 6273.5 6324.5 6274.0 6325.0 6274.5 6325.5 6275.0 6326.0 6275.5 6326.5 6281.0 6327.0 6281.5 6327.5 6282.0 6328.0 6282.5 6328.5 6283.0 6329.0 6283.5 6329.5 6284.0 6330.0 6284.5 6330.5 6300.5 6300.5 Simplex 6301.0 6301.0 Simplex 6301.5 6301.5 Simplex 6302.0 6302.0 Simplex 6302.5 6302.5 Simplex 6303.0 6303.0 Simplex 6303.5 6303.5 Simplex 6304.0 6304.0 Simplex 6304.5 6304.5 Simplex 6305.0 6305.0 Simplex 6305.5 6305.5 Simplex 6306.0 6306.0 Simplex 6306.5 6306.5 Simplex 6307.0 6307.0 Simplex 6307.5 6307.5 Simplex 6308.0 6308.0 Simplex 6308.5 6308.5 Simplex 6309.0 6309.0 Simplex 6309.5 6309.5 Simplex 6310.0 6310.0 Simplex 6310.5 6310.5 Simplex 6311.0 6311.0 Simplex CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks Appendix 657 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 6311.5 6311.5 Simplex 8376.5 8376.5 Simplex ( *1) 8377.0 8417.0 8377.5 8417.5 8378.0 8418.0 8378.5 8418.5 8379.0 8419.0 8379.5 8419.5 8380.0 8420.0 8380.5 8420.5 8381.0 8421.0 8381.5 8421.5 8382.0 8422.0 8382.5 8422.5 8383.0 8423.0 8383.5 8423.5 8384.0 8424.0 8384.5 8424.5 8385.0 8425.0 8385.5 8425.5 8386.0 8426.0 8386.5 8426.5 8387.0 8427.0 8387.5 8427.5 8388.0 8428.0 8388.5 8428.5 8389.0 8429.0 8389.5 8429.5 8390.0 8430.0 8390.5 8430.5 8391.0 8431.0 8391.5 8431.5 8392.0 8432.0 8392.5 8432.5 8393.0 8433.0 8393.5 8433.5 8394.0 8434.0 8394.5 8434.5 8395.0 8435.0 8395.5 8435.5 8396.0 8436.0 8396.5 8396.5 Simplex 8397.0 8397.0 Simplex 8397.5 8397.5 Simplex 8398.0 8398.0 Simplex 8398.5 8398.5 Simplex 8399.0 8399.0 Simplex 8399.5 8399.5 Simplex 8400.0 8400.0 Simplex 8400.5 8400.5 Simplex 8401.0 8401.0 Simplex 8401.5 8401.5 Simplex 8402.0 8402.0 Simplex 8402.5 8402.5 Simplex 8403.0 8403.0 Simplex 8403.5 8403.5 Simplex 8404.0 8404.0 Simplex 8404.5 8404.5 Simplex 8405.0 8405.0 Simplex 8405.5 8405.5 Simplex 8406.0 8406.0 Simplex 8406.5 8406.5 Simplex 8407.0 8407.0 Simplex 8407.5 8407.5 Simplex 8408.0 8408.0 Simplex 8408.5 8408.5 Simplex 8409.0 8409.0 Simplex 8409.5 8409.5 Simplex 8410.0 8410.0 Simplex 8410.5 8410.5 Simplex 8411.0 8411.0 Simplex 8411.5 8411.5 Simplex 8412.0 8412.0 Simplex 8412.5 8412.5 Simplex 8413.0 8413.0 Simplex 8413.5 8413.5 Simplex 8414.0 8414.0 Simplex 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 12477.0 12579.5 12477.5 12580.0 12478.0 12580.5 12478.5 12581.0 12479.0 12581.5 12479.5 12582.0 12480.0 12582.5 12480.5 12583.0 12481.0 12583.5 11-13 Appendix CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks 12481.5 12584.0 12482.0 12584.5 12482.5 12585.0 12483.0 12585.5 12483.5 12586.0 12484.0 12586.5 12484.5 12587.0 12485.0 12587.5 12485.5 12588.0 12486.0 12588.5 12486.5 12589.0 12487.0 12589.5 12487.5 12590.0 12488.0 12590.5 12488.5 12591.0 12489.0 12591.5 12489.5 12592.0 12490.0 12592.5 12490.5 12593.0 12491.0 12593.5 12491.5 12594.0 12492.0 12594.5 12492.5 12595.0 12493.0 12595.5 12493.5 12596.0 12494.0 12596.5 12494.5 12597.0 12495.0 12597.5 12495.5 12598.0 12496.0 12598.5 12496.5 12599.0 12497.0 12599.5 12497.5 12600.0 12498.0 12600.5 12498.5 12601.0 12499.0 12601.5 12499.5 12602.0 12500.0 12602.5 12500.5 12603.0 12501.0 12603.5 12501.5 12604.0 12502.0 12604.5 12502.5 12605.0 12503.0 12605.5 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 11-14 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 12503.5 12606.0 12504.0 12606.5 12504.5 12607.0 12505.0 12607.5 12505.5 12608.0 12506.0 12608.5 12506.5 12609.0 12507.0 12609.5 12507.5 12610.0 12508.0 12610.5 12508.5 12611.0 12509.0 12611.5 12509.5 12612.0 12510.0 12612.5 12510.5 12613.0 12511.0 12613.5 12511.5 12614.0 12512.0 12614.5 12512.5 12615.0 12513.0 12615.5 12513.5 12616.0 12514.0 12616.5 12514.5 12617.0 12515.0 12617.5 12515.5 12618.0 12516.0 12618.5 12516.5 12619.0 12517.0 12619.5 12517.5 12620.0 12518.0 12620.5 12518.5 12621.0 12519.0 12621.5 12519.5 12622.0 12520.0 12520.0 Simplex ( *1) 12520.5 12622.5 12521.0 12623.0 12521.5 12623.5 12522.0 12624.0 12522.5 12624.5 12523.0 12625.0 12523.5 12625.5 12524.0 12626.0 12524.5 12626.5 12525.0 12627.0 CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks Appendix 1298 1299 12525.5 12627.5 12526.0 12628.0 12100 12526.5 12628.5 12101 12527.0 12629.0 12102 12527.5 12629.5 12103 12528.0 12630.0 12104 12528.5 12630.5 12105 12529.0 12631.0 12106 12529.5 12631.5 12107 12530.0 12632.0 12108 12530.5 12632.5 12109 12531.0 12633.0 12110 12531.5 12633.5 12111 12532.0 12634.0 12112 12532.5 12634.5 12113 12533.0 12635.0 12114 12533.5 12635.5 12115 12534.0 12636.0 12116 12534.5 12636.5 12117 12535.0 12637.0 12118 12535.5 12637.5 12119 12536.0 12638.0 12120 12536.5 12638.5 12121 12537.0 12639.0 12122 12537.5 12639.5 12123 12538.0 12640.0 12124 12538.5 12640.5 12125 12539.0 12641.0 12126 12539.5 12641.5 12127 12540.0 12642.0 12128 12540.5 12642.5 12129 21541.0 12643.0 12130 12541.5 12643.5 12131 12542.0 12644.0 12132 12542.5 12644.5 12133 12543.0 12645.0 12134 12543.5 12645.5 12135 12544.0 12646.0 12136 12544.5 12646.5 12137 12545.0 12647.0 12138 12545.5 12647.5 12139 12546.0 12648.0 12140 12546.5 12648.5 12141 12547.0 12649.0 12142 12547.5 12649.5 12143 12548.0 12650.0 12144 12548.5 12650.5 12145 12549.0 12651.0 12146 12549.5 12651.5 12147 12555.0 12652.0 12148 12555.5 12652.5 12149 12556.0 12653.0 12150 12556.5 12653.5 12151 12557.0 12654.0 12152 12557.5 12654.5 12153 12558.0 12655.0 12154 12558.5 12655.5 12155 12559.0 12656.0 12156 12559.5 12656.5 12157 12560.0 12560.0 Simplex 12158 12560.5 12560.5 Simplex 12159 12561.0 12561.0 Simplex 12160 21561.5 12561.5 Simplex 12161 12562.0 12562.0 Simplex 12162 12562.5 12562.5 Simplex 12163 12563.0 12563.0 Simplex 12164 12563.5 12563.5 Simplex 12165 12564.0 12564.0 Simplex 12166 12564.5 12564.5 Simplex 12167 12565.0 12565.0 Simplex 12168 12565.5 12565.5 Simplex 12169 12566.0 12566.0 Simplex 12170 12566.5 12566.5 Simplex 12171 12567.0 12567.0 Simplex 12172 12567.5 12567.5 Simplex 12173 12568.0 12568.0 Simplex 12174 12568.5 12568.5 Simplex 12175 12569.0 12569.0 Simplex 12176 12569.5 12569.5 Simplex 12177 12570.0 12570.0 Simplex 12178 12570.5 12570.5 Simplex 12179 12571.0 12571.0 Simplex 12180 12571.5 12571.5 Simplex 12181 12572.0 12572.0 Simplex 12182 12572.5 12572.5 Simplex 12183 12573.0 12573.0 Simplex 12184 12573.5 12573.5 Simplex 12185 12574.0 12574.0 Simplex 11-15 Appendix CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks 12186 12574.5 12574.5 Simplex 12187 12575.0 12575.0 Simplex 12188 12575.5 12575.5 Simplex 12189 12576.0 12576.0 Simplex 12190 12576.5 12576.5 Simplex 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 11-16 16683.5 16807.0 16684.0 16807.5 16684.5 16808.0 16685.0 16808.5 16685.5 16809.0 16686.0 16809.5 16686.5 16810.0 16687.0 16810.5 16687.5 16811.0 16688.0 16811.5 16688.5 16812.0 16689.0 16812.5 16689.5 16813.0 16690.0 16813.5 16690.5 16814.0 16691.0 16814.5 16691.5 16815.0 16692.0 16815.5 16692.5 16816.0 16693.0 16816.5 16693.5 16817.0 16694.0 16817.5 16694.5 16818.0 16695.0 16695.0 Simplex ( *1) 16695.5 16818.5 16696.0 16819.0 16696.5 16819.5 16697.0 16820.0 16697.5 16820.5 16698.0 16821.0 16698.5 16821.5 16699.0 16822.0 16699.5 16822.5 16700.0 16823.0 16700.5 16823.5 16701.0 16824.0 16701.5 16824.5 16702.0 16825.0 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 16702.5 16825.5 16703.0 16826.0 16703.5 16826.5 16704.0 16827.0 16704.5 16827.5 16705.0 16828.0 16705.5 16828.5 16706.0 16829.0 16706.5 16829.5 16707.0 16830.0 16707.5 16830.5 16708.0 16831.0 16708.5 16831.5 16709.0 16832.0 16709.5 16832.5 16710.0 16833.0 16710.5 16833.5 16711.0 16834.0 16711.5 16834.5 16712.0 16835.0 16712.5 16835.5 16713.0 16836.0 16713.5 16836.5 16714.0 16837.0 16714.5 16837.5 16715.0 16838.0 16715.5 16838.5 16716.0 16839.0 16716.5 16839.5 16717.0 16840.0 16717.5 16840.5 16718.0 16841.0 16718.5 16841.5 16719.0 16842.0 16719.5 16842.5 16720.0 16843.0 16720.5 16843.5 16721.0 16844.0 16721.5 16844.5 16722.0 16845.0 16722.5 16845.5 16723.0 16846.0 16723.5 16846.5 16724.0 16847.0 CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks Appendix 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 16724.5 16847.5 16725.0 16848.0 16725.5 16848.5 16726.0 16849.0 16726.5 16849.5 16727.0 16850.0 16727.5 16850.5 16728.0 16851.0 16728.5 16851.5 16729.0 16852.0 16729.5 16852.5 16730.0 16853.0 16730.5 16853.5 16731.0 16854.0 16731.5 16854.5 16732.0 16855.0 16732.5 16855.5 16100 16733.0 16856.0 16101 16733.5 16856.5 16102 16739.0 16857.0 16103 16739.5 16857.5 16104 16740.0 16858.0 16105 16740.5 16858.5 16106 16741.0 16859.0 16107 16741.5 16859.5 16108 16742.0 16860.0 16109 16742.5 16860.5 16110 16743.0 16861.0 16111 16743.5 16861.5 16112 16744.0 16862.0 16113 16744.5 16862.5 16114 16745.0 16863.0 16115 16745.5 16863.5 16116 16746.0 16864.0 16117 16746.5 16864.5 16118 16747.0 16865.0 16119 16747.5 16865.5 16120 16748.0 16866.0 16121 16748.5 16866.5 16122 16749.0 16867.0 16123 16749.5 16867.5 16124 16750.0 16868.0 16125 16750.5 16868.5 16126 16751.0 16869.0 16127 16751.5 16869.5 16128 16752.0 16870.0 16129 16752.5 16870.5 16130 16753.0 16871.0 16131 16753.5 16871.5 16132 16754.0 16872.0 16133 16754.5 16872.5 16134 16755.0 16873.0 16135 16755.5 16873.5 16136 16756.0 16874.0 16137 16756.5 16874.5 16138 16757.0 16875.0 16139 16757.5 16875.5 16140 16758.0 16876.0 16141 16758.5 16876.5 16142 16759.0 16877.0 16143 16759.5 16877.5 16144 16760.0 16878.0 16145 16760.5 16878.5 16146 16761.0 16879.0 16147 16761.5 16879.5 16148 16762.0 16880.0 16149 16762.5 16880.5 16150 16763.0 16881.0 16151 16763.5 16881.5 16152 16764.0 16882.0 16153 16764.5 16882.5 16154 16765.0 16883.0 16155 16765.5 16883.5 16156 16766.0 16884.0 16157 16766.5 16884.5 16158 16767.0 16885.0 16159 16767.5 16885.5 16160 16768.0 16886.0 16161 16768.5 16886.5 16162 16769.0 16887.0 16163 16769.5 16887.5 16164 16770.0 16888.0 16165 16770.5 16888.5 16166 16771.0 16889.0 16167 16771.5 16889.5 16168 16772.0 16890.0 16169 16772.5 16890.5 16170 16773.0 16891.0 11-17 Appendix CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks 16171 16773.5 16891.5 16172 16774.0 16892.0 16173 16774.5 16892.5 16174 16775.0 16893.0 16175 16775.5 16893.5 16176 16776.0 16894.0 16177 16776.5 16894.5 16178 16777.0 16895.0 16179 16777.5 16895.5 16180 16778.0 16896.0 16181 16778.5 16896.5 16182 16779.0 16897.0 16183 16779.5 16897.5 16184 16780.0 16898.0 16185 16780.5 16898.5 16186 16781.0 16899.0 16187 16781.5 16899.5 16188 16782.0 16900.0 16189 16782.5 16900.5 16190 16783.0 16901.0 16191 16783.5 16901.5 16192 16784.0 16902.0 16193 16784.5 16902.5 16194 16785.0 16785.0 Simplex 16195 16785.5 16785.5 Simplex 16196 16786.0 16786.0 Simplex 16197 16786.5 16786.5 Simplex 16198 16787.0 16787.0 Simplex 16199 16787.5 16787.5 Simplex 16200 16788.0 16788.0 Simplex 16201 16788.5 16788.5 Simplex 16202 16789.0 16789.0 Simplex 16203 16789.5 16789.5 Simplex 16204 16790.0 16790.0 Simplex 16205 16790.5 16790.5 Simplex 16206 16791.0 16791.0 Simplex 16207 16791.5 16791.5 Simplex 16208 16792.0 16792.0 Simplex 16209 16792.5 16792.5 Simplex 16210 16793.0 16793.0 Simplex 16211 16793.5 16793.5 Simplex 16212 16794.0 16794.0 Simplex 16213 16794.5 16794.5 Simplex 16214 16795.0 16795.0 Simplex 11-18 16215 16795.5 16795.5 Simplex 16216 16796.0 16796.0 Simplex 16217 16796.5 16796.5 Simplex 16218 16797.0 16797.0 Simplex 16219 16797.5 16797.5 Simplex 16220 16798.0 16798.0 Simplex 16221 16798.5 16798.5 Simplex 16222 16799.0 16799.0 Simplex 16223 16799.5 16799.5 Simplex 16224 16800.0 16800.0 Simplex 16225 16800.5 16800.5 Simplex 16226 16801.0 16801.0 Simplex 16227 16801.5 16801.5 Simplex 16228 16802.0 16802.0 Simplex 16229 16802.5 16802.5 Simplex 16230 16803.0 16803.0 Simplex 16231 16803.5 16803.5 Simplex 16232 16804.0 16804.0 Simplex 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 18870.5 19681.0 18871.0 19681.5 18871.5 19682.0 18872.0 19682.5 18872.5 19683.0 18873.0 19683.5 18873.5 19684.0 18874.0 19684.5 18874.5 19685.0 18875.0 19685.5 18875.5 19686.0 18876.0 19686.5 18876.5 19687.0 18877.0 19687.5 18877.5 19688.0 18878.0 19688.5 18878.5 19689.0 18879.0 19689.5 18879.5 19690.0 18880.0 19690.5 18880.5 19691.0 18881.0 19691.5 18881.5 19692.0 18882.0 19692.5 18882.5 19693.0 CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks Appendix 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 18883.0 19693.5 18883.5 19694.0 18884.0 19694.5 18884.5 19695.0 18885.0 19695.5 18885.5 19696.0 18886.0 19696.5 18886.5 19697.0 18887.0 19697.5 18887.5 19698.0 18888.0 19698.5 18888.5 19699.0 18889.0 19699.5 18889.5 19700.0 18890.0 19700.5 18890.5 19701.0 18891.0 19701.5 18891.5 19702.0 18892.0 19702.5 18892.5 19703.0 18893.0 18893.0 Simplex 18893.5 18893.5 Simplex 18894.0 18894.0 Simplex 18894.5 18894.5 Simplex 18895.0 18895.0 Simplex 18895.5 18895.5 Simplex 18896.0 18896.0 Simplex 18896.5 18896.5 Simplex 18897.0 18897.0 Simplex 18897.5 18897.5 Simplex 18898.0 18898.0 Simplex 22284.5 22376.5 22285.0 22377.0 22285.5 22377.5 22286.0 22378.0 22286.5 22378.5 22287.0 22379.0 22287.5 22379.5 22288.0 22380.0 22288.5 22380.5 22289.0 22381.0 22289.5 22381.5 22290.0 22382.0 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 22290.5 22382.5 22291.0 22383.0 22291.5 22383.5 22292.0 22384.0 22292.5 22384.5 22293.0 22385.0 22293.5 22385.5 22294.0 22386.0 22294.5 22386.5 22295.0 22387.0 22295.5 22387.5 22296.0 22388.0 22296.5 22388.5 22297.0 22389.0 22297.5 22389.5 22298.0 22390.0 22298.5 22390.5 22299.0 22391.0 22299.5 22391.5 22300.0 22392.0 22300.5 22392.5 22301.0 22393.0 22301.5 22393.5 22302.0 22394.0 22302.5 22394.5 22303.0 22395.0 22303.5 22395.5 22304.0 22396.0 22304.5 22396.5 22305.0 22397.0 22305.5 22397.5 22306.0 22398.0 22306.5 22398.5 22307.0 22399.0 22307.5 22399.5 22308.0 22400.0 22308.5 22400.5 22309.0 22401.0 22309.5 22401.5 22310.0 22402.0 22310.5 22402.5 22311.0 22403.0 22311.5 22403.5 22312.0 22404.0 11-19 Appendix CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 22312.5 22404.5 22313.0 22405.0 22313.5 22405.5 22314.0 22406.0 22314.5 22406.5 22315.0 22407.0 22315.5 22407.5 22316.0 22408.0 22316.5 22408.5 22317.0 22409.0 22317.5 22409.5 22318.0 22410.0 22318.5 22410.5 22319.0 22411.0 22319.5 22411.5 22320.0 22412.0 22320.5 22412.5 22321.0 22413.0 22321.5 22413.5 22322.0 22414.0 22322.5 22414.5 22323.0 22415.0 22323.5 22415.5 22324.0 22416.0 22324.5 22416.5 22325.0 22417.0 22325.5 22417.5 22326.0 22418.0 22326.5 22418.5 22327.0 22419.0 22327.5 22419.5 22328.0 22420.0 22328.5 22420.5 22329.0 22421.0 22329.5 22421.5 22330.0 22422.0 22330.5 22422.5 22331.0 22423.0 22331.5 22423.5 22332.0 22424.0 22332.5 22424.5 22333.0 22425.0 22333.5 22425.5 22100 22334.0 22426.0 11-20 22101 22334.5 22426.5 22102 22335.0 22427.0 22103 22335.5 22427.5 22104 22336.0 22428.0 22105 22336.5 22428.5 22106 22337.0 22429.0 22107 22337.5 22429.5 22108 22338.0 22430.0 22109 22338.5 22430.5 22110 22339.0 22431.0 22111 22339.5 22431.5 22112 22340.0 22432.0 22113 22340.5 22432.5 22114 22341.0 22433.0 22115 22341.5 22433.5 22116 22342.0 22434.0 22117 22342.5 22434.5 22118 22343.0 22435.0 22119 22343.5 22435.5 22120 22344.0 22436.0 22121 22344.5 22436.5 22122 22345.0 22437.0 22123 22345.5 22437.5 22124 22346.0 22438.0 22125 22346.5 22438.5 22126 22347.0 22439.0 22127 22347.5 22439.5 22128 22348.0 22440.0 22129 22348.5 22440.5 22130 22349.0 22441.0 22131 22349.5 22441.5 22132 22350.0 22442.0 22133 22350.5 22442.5 22134 22351.0 22443.0 22135 22351.5 22443.5 22136 22352.0 22352.0 Simplex 22137 22352.5 22352.5 Simplex 22138 22353.0 22353.0 Simplex 22139 22353.5 22353.5 Simplex 22140 22354.0 22354.0 Simplex 22141 22354.5 22354.5 Simplex 22142 22355.0 22355.0 Simplex 22143 22355.5 22355.5 Simplex 22144 22356.0 22356.0 Simplex CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks Appendix 22145 22356.5 22356.5 Simplex 22146 22357.0 22357.0 Simplex 22147 22357.5 22357.5 Simplex 22148 22358.0 22358.0 Simplex 22149 22358.5 22358.5 Simplex 22150 22359.0 22359.0 Simplex 22151 22359.5 22359.5 Simplex 22152 22360.0 22360.0 Simplex 22153 22360.5 22360.5 Simplex 22154 22361.0 22361.0 Simplex 22155 22361.5 22361.5 Simplex 22156 22362.0 22362.0 Simplex 22157 22362.5 22362.5 Simplex 22158 22363.0 22363.0 Simplex 22159 22363.5 22363.5 Simplex 22160 22364.0 22364.0 Simplex 22161 22364.5 22364.5 Simplex 22162 22365.0 22365.0 Simplex 22163 22365.5 22365.5 Simplex 22164 22366.0 22366.0 Simplex 22165 22366.5 22366.5 Simplex 22166 22367.0 22367.0 Simplex 22167 22367.5 22367.5 Simplex 22168 22368.0 22368.0 Simplex 22169 22368.5 22368.5 Simplex 22170 22369.0 22369.0 Simplex 22171 22369.5 22369.5 Simplex 22172 22370.0 22370.0 Simplex 22173 22370.5 22370.5 Simplex 22174 22371.0 22371.0 Simplex 22175 22371.5 22371.5 Simplex 22176 22372.0 22372.0 Simplex 22177 22372.5 22372.5 Simplex 22178 22373.0 22373.0 Simplex 22179 22373.5 22373.5 Simplex 22180 22374.0 22374.0 Simplex 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 25173.0 26101.0 25173.5 26101.5 25174.0 26102.0 25174.5 26102.5 25175.0 26103.0 25175.5 26103.5 25176.0 26104.0 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 25176.5 26104.5 25177.0 26105.0 25177.5 26105.5 25178.0 26106.0 25178.5 26106.5 25179.0 26107.0 25179.5 26107.5 25180.0 26108.0 25180.5 26108.5 25181.0 26109.0 25181.5 26109.5 25182.0 26110.0 25182.5 26110.5 25183.0 26111.0 25183.5 26111.5 25184.0 26112.0 25184.5 26112.5 25185.0 26113.0 25185.5 26113.5 25186.0 26114.0 25186.5 26114.5 25187.0 26115.0 25187.5 26115.5 25188.0 26116.0 25188.5 26116.5 25189.0 26117.0 25189.5 26117.5 25190.0 26118.0 25190.5 26118.5 25191.0 26119.0 25191.5 26119.5 25192.0 26120.0 25192.5 26120.5 25193.0 25193.0 Simplex 25193.5 25193.5 Simplex 25194.0 25194.0 Simplex 25194.5 25194.5 Simplex 25195.0 25195.0 Simplex 25195.5 25195.5 Simplex 25196.0 25196.0 Simplex 25196.5 25196.5 Simplex 25197.0 25197.0 Simplex 25197.5 25197.5 Simplex 25198.0 25198.0 Simplex 11-21 Appendix CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks CH No. Tx kHz Rx kHz Remarks 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 25203.5 25203.5 Simplex 25204.0 25204.0 Simplex 25204.5 25204.5 Simplex 25205.0 25205.0 Simplex 25205.5 25205.5 Simplex 25206.0 25206.0 Simplex 25206.5 25206.5 Simplex 25207.0 25207.0 Simplex 25207.5 25207.5 Simplex 25208.0 25208.0 Simplex 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 25198.5 25198.5 Simplex 25199.0 25199.0 Simplex 25199.5 25199.5 Simplex 25200.0 25200.0 Simplex 25200.5 25200.5 Simplex 25201.0 25201.0 Simplex 25201.5 25201.5 Simplex 25202.0 25202.0 Simplex 25202.5 25202.5 Simplex 25203.0 25203.0 Simplex 2561

*1) Used for distress and safety purposes. 11-22 Appendix 11.5 Guide to MF/HF operation Be aware of the following points when using the MF/HF radio equipment.

Frequencies available for communication are always changing.

Not all frequency bandwidths can always be used for communication.

After sending the DSC test call to a coast station, you will not always receive the acknowledgement. 1. About the MF/HF radio equipment Although for ship MF/HF radio equipment the 1.6 MHz to 27.5 MHz frequencies are normally available, select an appropriate frequency from the frequencies assigned to your ship for communication. As noted below, the use of the appropriate frequency depends upon ionosphere. Therefore, not all frequency bands are available for communication even if the equipment is functioning properly. the radio wave propagation characteristics of the 2. Special characteristics of MF/HF radio wave propagation E Ionosphere E layer F 1 / F 2 Ionosphere F1/F2 layer radio waves used As shown in the figure to the right, the major MF/HF for communications are terrestrial waves

(path 1) and waves reflected from the ionosphere (paths 2 and 3). You can communicate using waves reflected from the ionosphere and the earth because the effective communication range of terrestrial waves is limited6. The available range of frequencies for communication depends upon the radio wave propagation characteristics of the ionosphere. They will also change dramatically depending on the position and distance from the station, the season, the time, and the sunspot number (approx. 0 to 250) which changes every 11 years7. 3. Selecting communication frequencies Station A A D Ionosphere D layer Station B B Earth 2 3 1 MF/HF band communication frequencies cannot be predetermined. However, you can select frequencies referring to previous communications logs, the frequency transition table in this chapter under "Selecting communication frequencies in the MF/HF band

(reference)", and the radio wave propagation image. 4. About DSC testing DSC operation is prescribed as an international standard 8 of the ITU and coast stations that receive DSC test calls should acknowledge the calls. Responses may be sent manually instead of automatically depending on the equipment at the coast station. It may take longer than expected to receive the acknowledgement even if your equipment is functioning properly and you have selected the proper frequency. 6 You may experience skip zones where both terrestrial waves and waves reflected from the ionosphere are unavailable at the end of the effective communication range of terrestrial waves. 7 Radio wave propagation is affected by phasing, the Dellinger phenomenon, magnetic storms, and atmospherics. Interference tends to be greater at night when radio waves can travel greater distances. 8 ITU-R Recommendation M. 541 11-23 Appendix Selecting communication frequencies in the MF/HF band (reference) When communicating with the MF/HF radio equipment, select frequencies referring to the frequency transition table and the radio wave propagation images (excluding the polar latitudes) shown below9. Example: When communicating with a station approximately 5000 km away at around 12 pm in the winter with a sunspot number of 100, select frequencies in the 18, 22, or 25 MHz bands for the best results. Guideline for selecting frequency (for a sunspot count of 100)

= 100 2M 4M 6M 8M 12M 16M 18M 22M 25M

Frequency transition table Transmissions conditions Distance Long distances

(e.g. 5000 km) 5000km Short distances

(e.g. 1000 km) 1000km Summer Winter Season & time Day Night Day Night Day Night Day Night Winter Summer

Radio wave propagation images 9 These are based on the prediction of HF radio wave propagations. Communication is not guaranteed. 11-24 7ZPJD0604 Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements of Electronic Information Products Japan Radio Company Limited

(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements

(Type): JSS 2250/2500

(Type): JSS-2250/2500

(Name): MF/HF Radio equipment

(Name): MF/HF Radio equipment

(Part name)

(Antenna)

(

)

(Inboard Unit)

(Peripherals)

(Options)

(Printer)

(Cables)

(Cables)

(Documennts)

(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr6+)

(PBB)

(PBDE) SJ/T11306-2006

(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.) SJ/T11363-2006

(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.) RE:

Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China 1 / 1 Marking with market circulation mark According to the requirements of clause 20 of Technical Regulations about safety of Maritime transport objetcs, approved by Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment #620 dated August 12, 2010 and requirements Technical Regulation of the Russian Federation Goverment

#623 dated August 12, 2010 navigation & radiotelephone equipment should be marked by company manufacturer with market-circulation mark the way it is determined by Legislation of the Russia federation on technical regulation. According to the airticle 27 PZ No184 FZ of Federal Law about Technical Regulation dated December 12, 2002 and Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment dated 19.11.03 No0696 navigation equipment has an appropriate marking. The marking can be perfomed by one of four variants, depending on surface colour of equipment. The images should be grey scale and should contrast against the surface colour (ref. to the Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment No696 <<About market circulation mark>>

dated November 19, 2003). The marking of Radio and navigational equipment should be done by the manufacturer (supplier) according to the clause 2 of the article 27 of the Federal Law No.184 FZ << About technical Regulation>> and should be applied right to device surface.

- 1/1 -